Adler Hebrew001st

STUDENT'S
HEBREW
GRAMMAR,
WITH
EXERCISES AND
VOCABULARIES.
BY
MICHAEL ADLER, B.A.,

Minister of the Central Synagogue; formerly Senior Hebrew
Master at the Jeios* Free School, London ; Author of
"First Steps in Hebrew Grammar."
SECOND EDITION.
L O N D O N :
D A V I D N U T T , 57 & 59, L O N G
1908,
ACRE.
LONDON :
PRINTED BY WERTHEIMER, LEA AND CO.,
CLIFTON HOUSE, WORSHIP STREET.
PREFACE TO THE FIRST EDITION.
THE present work is intended for students who aim at acquiring an accurate
knowledge of the essentials of Hebrew Grammar. It does not profess to
be a complete Grammar, but rather to serve as an introductory manual to
the use of the Standard Hebrew Grammar, the Kautsch-Gesenius.
The plan of the book is based upon the experience of many years as a
teacher of elementary and advanced students, and follows upon the lines of
my "Elements of Hebrew Grammar," + that has obtained so gratifying a sale.
Subjects that present serious difficulties to the beginner, such as the laws of
the changes of vowels, have been simplified, and all non-essential details,
such as the exact formation of Noun forms from Verb roots, altogether
omitted. The Syntax has been interwoven throughout with the Accidence,
and. the graduated Exercises are designed to illustrate the laws of Syntax
and teach the forms of the inflections. In the earlier Exercises, all the
phrases are not Biblical, but, from Exercise 15 the sentences are taken,
almost without exception, from the Bible, and thus form a useful introduction to the language of the Scriptures. The study of the text of the Bible
should commence as soon as the subjects treated of in my " Elements of
Hebrew Grammar " have been mastered.
For a student who has not previously learned the elements of the
language, it would be advisable, in using this book, to pass from Chapter IV.
to Chapter IX., and to learn the intervening chapters later. The Verb
forms would thus be learnt immediately after the Unchangeable Noun.
The Tables of the Changeable Nouns are based upon those in KautschGesenius, pages 274 sq. The method of learning the Verb as described on
* English Edition by Collins and Cowley. Oxford : Clarendon Press, 1898.
f This manual was afterwards rewritten and published under the name of
" First Steps in Hebrew Grammar," 1904.
iv
PREFACE.
pp. 79, 80, is the outcome of practical experiments that have demonstrated
to me that the numerous forms of the Verb are thereby better retained in
the memory.
In compiling the Vocabularies to the Exercises, I received most
valuable assistance from my dear wife, and I further desire to express my
sincere gratitude to my honoured teacher, Dr. Friedlander, of Jews' College,
who read through my MS. and favoured me with some of the results of his
life-long acquaintance with the Sacred Tongue. If this book be of some
help in promoting a systematic study of the language of the Bible, and
enable students to enjoy to the full the rich treasures of Holy Writ, I
shall regard myself as amply rewarded for my labours in preparing it.
M. A.
PREFACE TO THE SECOND EDITION.
BEYOND the correction of a few misprints and some additions to the

Vocabularies, this edition is a reprint of the first. Students who require
to have the earlier portions of the Grammar explained in fuller detail
should consult my " First Steps in Hebrew Grammar."
M. A.
38, HALLAM STREET,
PORTLAND PLACE,
W.
1908.
All rights reserved.
CONTENTS.
CHAPTER I.
PAGE
1-3
4
5
6
7-9
io
H-12
13
14
15
16
The Alphabet
Classification of the Letters...
The Vowels
Syllables
The Shevo
The Dogesh, nBT and P'?D
31?, 'li"?
The Accents...
'IP and 3V13
1
3
4
o
o
7
9
9
12
13
14
Changes in Vowels, and Pausal forms

Radical and Servile Letters...
CHAPTER II.
17
The Article
18-21 Pronouns
21A
Agreement
22-23 Particles.
...
...
of Verb and Noun,
18
The Verb TO BE
Section 1
24-25 Pronouns joined to Prepositions

26
16
21
22
...
...
...
22
Relative Pronoun with Prepositions and Adverbs
24
VI
CONTENTS.
CHAPTER III.
NOUNS AND A D J E C T I V E S .
PAGE
27-28
29
30
31
32-34
35
36
Gender. Number
The Dual
Plurals of Nouns with simple changeable Vowel
The Particle 1
Adjectives
Objective Case after Transitive Verb
Absolute and Construct States
26
27
28
29
29
31
33
CHAPTER IV.
NOUNS
(continued).
37-41 Inflection of Masculine and Feminine Nouns. Unchangeable and with simple changeable Yowels
42
Nouns with Irregular Plurals
...
...
...
43
Adjectives with In/iected Nouns ...
... %
...
44
Rule of Personal Pronoun being added in a
sentence. Feminine of Verb forms
...
...
45
Formation of Nouns...
...
...
...
...
46
Cases of Nouns
CHAPTER
NOUNS
(continued).
CHAPTER
51-52
53
54
55
38
40
*40
V.
4 7 - 5 0 B Inflection of changeable Nouns, Masculine

50c
How to parse a Noun
...
...
...
33
37
38
...
...
41
49
...
...
...
...
49^
52
53
54
VI.
Inflection of changeable Nouns, Feminine...

Further peculiarities of Feminine Nouns ...
Dual Nouns
...
Irregular Nouns
...
...
...
...
Vll
CONTENTS.
CHAPTER
PARTICLES.
VII.
Section n .
PAGE
56-62 Inseparable, Separable, and Inflected Particles

CHAPTER
...
56
...
64
VIII.
NUMERALS.
63-68 Cardinal and Ordinal Numbers, and their rules

CHAPTER
IX.
THE VERB.
69-71
72-76
77
78-81
82
83-87
88
^
The Root and the Conjugations

Moods and Tenses
Regular and Irregular Verbs
Prefixes and Suffixes of t h e Verb .
Hints upon learning the Verb
Table of the Regular Verb ...
Notes on the Verb forms
CHAPTER
THE VERB
X.
{continued).
89
How to parse a Verb
...
...
...
...
88
89A, 8 9 B Syntax of the Verb
89-91
90
1 Conversive
...
...
...
92
91
Jussive and Cohortative forms of the Future
...
96
92
Notes on the Imperative, Infinitive, and Participle
99
93
The Present Tense ...
...
... 103
94
Notes on the Conjugations.
Sentences with the
expression of an oath. Transposition of letters
in the Hithpael
...
...
...
...
... 103
95
Rarer Conjugations ...
106
Vlll
CONTENTS.
CHAPTER
XI.
PAGE
96-104 The Verb with

Pronoun
Accusative
CHAPTER
Suffixes
of
the
106
XH.
105-113 Guttural Verbs

CHAPTER
112
XIII.
114-115 Classes of Irregular Verbs

116-117 Irregular Verbs J"S
118-119
V'V
CHAPTER
...
...
...
XIV.
120
Irregular Verbs K"D
121-122
*"B
123-124
)"y
125-126
K"h
127-128
nHX?
CHAPTER
132
135
139
144
147
XV.
129-132 Doubly Irregular Verbs

CHAPTER
152
XVI.
133-136 Doubly Irregular Verbs {continued)

CHAPTER
123
124
128
158
XVII.
137-139 Hebrew Poetry

140
Comparative Table of Regular and Irregular
Verbs
Vocabulary I.Hebrew-English
' II.English-Hebrew
164
167
170
185
STUDENT'S HEBREW GRAMMAR.

CHAPTEK I.
The Alphabet,
1. Hebrew is a branch of the family of Semitic languages,
that also includes Arabic, Phoenician, Syriac and Chaldee.
It
derives its name from the Hebrews, who were the most
prominent of the descendants of *!!}$? Eber (Genesis xi. 16)
that retained their ancestor's name.* The writings, from which
the Grammar of Hebrew is derived, consist of that collection
of books called the Tp'fi or Bible, f
2.
The Alphabet consists of twenty-two letters, all of which
are Consonants.
The Vowels are supplied by certain points
and dashes placed under, above, or in the middle of the

Consonants.
* Another derivation of " H e b r e w " is from the phrase iri3rt "QJJD {see
Joshua xxiv. 2), the people who came " from the bank of (or, from beyond)
the river Euphrates."
f There exist only two ancient inscriptions in a Hebrew dialect, viz.:
the Moabite Stone, of the time of King- Mesa of Moab (9th Century B.C.),
and the Inscription of Siloam, attributed to the days of King Hezekiah
(8th Century B.C.)
The word *]'yr\ is made up of the words PHIF) Law, the Pentateuch, DW33
Prophets, and D ^ i n a Hagiographa.
B

THE LETTERS.
RASHI* SCRIPT.
Ahlef.
2
n
1
T
n
D
t
P
D
Finals.
Finals.
1^
i
D P
I i
1 *
y
5] fi
q P
NUMERICAL
VALUE. J
NAMES.f
*UfL
Beth (Bice, Yice).

Gimel.
Dalet.
hJbtAL
Hei.
He
Yav.
V^
Zayin.
2>a^~
Cheth (Ches) as in loch.
Teth (Tes).
Yod.
Kaf, Chaf.
Lamed.
Mem.
Noon.
Mc^y
Samech.
Ayin.
Pei, Fei.
Tzaddi.
Koof.
^**~
^ /
^C
n
D
Sheen, Seen (.S^'d).

Tav (Tav, Sav) 7^w*-
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
200
300
400
* This form of the Alphabet is largely used in Rabbinical works, and derives
its name from its being employed especially in the printed editions of Rashi,
^pPIV! nb^>$ *5H CEO), the famous commentator of the Bible and the Talmud,
who lived in the 12th Century.
f The thicker portion of the name denotes the sound of the letter. Thus :
3 is 1>,.3 is g (as in the English word go'), 1 is d, etc. N and V> have no sound,
but follow that of their vowels. The sound ng for JJ is declared to be wrong
by modern grammarians.
X These numerical values are not used in the Biblical text. /The intermediate
numbers are formed by combining the units and tens : 3 6 = 1 / , 192=3p.
CLASSIFICATION OF THE LETTERS.
3 . There are two systems of reading Hebrewthe one

adopted by the Spanish and Portuguese Jews (DH^SD), and
by most non-Jewish scholars ; the other, that of the German
and Polish Jews (D*U3#K>
According to the first system, 3 and 3 (i.e., with the dot
called $yi Dogesh * [Dagesh]), are always b; H and F\ are
always t) but 3 is p, and 3 is / ; 3 is k, and 3 is eh.
According to the German system, when the six letters
fl'S'S'Y^'?1
have a Dogesh, they are hardened. Thus :
D, 3 , 3 , 3 are b, k,p,t; but J"), S, D, 3 are 0, cA, / , .
The five letters X'S'i'fi'3 , t when placed at the end of a
word have a distinct final form.
$ and b* are distinguished by the position of the dot,
which is called the " diacritical point."
There are no capital letters.
There is no hyphen, therefore every word must be written
in full on the same line.
4.
C l a s s i f i c a t i o n of t h e L e t t e r s .
The letters are arranged in five classes, according to the
organs by which they are uttered, viz.:
1. Gutturals, (pronounced with the throat) JMI'LTX
2.
Palatials, (
palate)
p'5'*'J
3.
Linguals, (
tongue) -
rViVEn
4.
Dentals,
teeth)
fl'^'D'T
5.
Labials,
lips) -
T^'ST^F "*
* See 10, p. 7. The names as read_ia the_ G-ermansystem are ujed in this
bookL Thus Dogesn7 Shevo, etc., for Dage3h, ~Sheva, etc.
f These letters are punctuated and formed into a word to serve as a
mnemonic. This is frequently done in Hebrew Grammar (see 4). In
modern times, no distinction is made in sound between!) and 2, 1 or 1, in either
system, although a distinction is-still maintained in some Oriental countries.
B2
>
In Class 4, both $ and & are included.

The letter 1 is also frequently classed with the Gutturals.
The Dentals are also called Sibilants (or hissing-letters).
The letters ^'Vn'N, when after a vowel, and without any
distinct sound, are called Quiescent letters.
Example:
5.
The Vowels.*
There are five Long and five Short Vowels
LONG VOWELS.
Portuguese reading.
German reading.
1.
a as in father
o as in note.
2.
ay
ah've(or^)
supreme e
supreme.
BO
ow
now.
oo
voot
oo
root.
3.
^na pyr\
4.
5.
SHORT VOWELS.
Po? 'tuguese reading.
1.
2.
3. 4. 5.
German reading.
nns
a as in father
a as in father.
SiJD
j>
men
fate or fat.
?>
fit-
at.
(5
not
5>
fwll
OJ .. ...fwll.
|faj5 p V n (short
Jbj5 f Oj5 (or re|? i

n-icn) short ri? I
not.
* There is another system of classifying the Vowels, that is based upon the
three primary vowel sounds A, E (which includes I), and U (which includes 0).
There are thus three classes of vowels:
First Class : A Sound1. pDj3 ; 2 . njTIB ; 3 . VlJD (as in the word npS).
Second Class: E and / Sounds1. 9 f t t prn \ 2. jfcg P T O ; 3. H * ;
(as in the word i3).
Third Class : U and 0 Sounds1. DTir : ; 2. Y&\> ; 3 . DS'IPI ; 4. ;bn Pj3.
THE VOWELS.
Notes on the Vowels.(a) Observe that the name of each vowel

has that vowel itself in the first syllable. Thus : Vp, 1"W9 (except
VPi?.(b) V9B is boih Long and Short. It is Short:1.
When
it is a closed accentless 1 syllable. 2 Thus : ^H^tP has the accent on
the second syllable, and the Y^?l? under the & is short; but in f"H5>tt7
where the accent is on the E7, the Y^P is long. In the word D ^ ,
the accent is on the second syllable, therefore both V?l7 are long.
2. When before a Guttural with , as T E ^ . In nearly all other
cases, the YPP is long.
nnQ.-(c) The n n coming under the H or n at the end of a
word is pronounced before the final letter. Thus : D-TH is read
roo-ach, and not roo-cha; 7?3| is read go-vow-ah, and not go-vow-ha.
This HOB is called the r p ^ J l nriQ, the furtive or sfo/ett n n Q .
Defective and i^w/Z writing.(J) The 1 of the
and the ** of
the V n | p ^ O are occasionally omitted. The word is then said to
be defective p P t f ) ; when the Dîn and the V h | P T O are written
in full, the word is said to be full (KvE). Examples: Defective
writing, ^"Wn, ^?bfen . Full writing, V ^ W , * j y V t e n . When the
V ^ p is employed in place of the P*JW, the word is also said to be
defective.
T h u s : Dp*? is defective, Etifi&full.
6.
Syllables a r e : ! . Open or simple, w h e n t h e y end in a
vowel or one of t h e letters

syllables a r e open.
a consonant.
7.
VP!'.
Thus:
tflKX^,
a11
the
2. Closed or compound, w h e n t h e y end in
T h u s : ft55> b o t h syllables are closed.
NMP.In addition to t h e t e n vowels, there is a sign
w r i t t e n u n d e r a letter, called a fcO> (Sh e vo, Sh e va).

1
See 13.
*8ee.6.
There are two kinds of JfltP, viz. :

1.
Pl3 &0^, the nlent or quiescent or resting JOB*.
2. yj Nlfe?> the sounding or moveable JOB*.

1. !"|JfcOfc^-The^7mfcOfeJ*is not written under the last
T
letter of a word, except (a) when the last letter is a "f, as

*?|Vl3, ^|/; (b) or, when the word ends in two vowelless consonants, as PlBÎ, FwfaD', i n this case both have the silent fctf$.
The silent H)$ has no sound whatever, and serves simply
as an indication that the letter has no vowel sign, and that
the syllable is a closed one.
8.
2. The sounding or moveable H)$ This has the sound of
short e in the phrase the books, said quickly, and is thus

used :
(a) At the beginning of a word, as 7bp> *J?1; (except
under the letters JJ'n'n'K).
(b) When in the middle of a word, two consecutive letters
have bi)$, the first is silent H)$, and the second a
T
sounding tfj#; as ^l-D^Sl b e shiv-t e -cho (b e shib-t e -cha).

(c) Under the first of two equal letters; as T ^ I T .
(d) Under a letter after a JHfi ( s ^ 11, 2).
(e) Under a letter with a strong Dogesh (see 10, note S).
THE VOWELS.
9.
Compound tf\& or H a l f - V o w e l s .
There are three half-vowels, compounded of a H)$ and a
short vowel, viz.:
i. - nne tpn; as in -\m; nton.

2. - f & D t)ton ; as in ^ H , n y \
3. 7\X3 tjtjn; as in nbX, pCNH.
These are found chiefly under the Gutturals JJ'H'PTN, as in
the above examples, where other letters would take a H)p.
The word fttOH means short, and denotes that the vowel
has to be read very quickly.
10,
The Dogesh
Wll.
The Dogesh is a dot that can be placed in the centre of

a letter.
There are two kinds of Dogesh :
A.
A.
The Weak Dogesh (Dogesh Lene) Sj5 &F\.
B.
The Strong Dogesh (Dogesh Forte) DJPI S W The Weak Dogesh:This
only appears in the letters
rVS'S'l/J'S , and has the effect of hardening the letters (see

3, p. 3 and note).
The Weak Dogesh is placed in one of these letters :(1) When
it commences a word, as J3, 7 H 3 , T H , {PI3, fTlS, iTTlft.
Except when preceded by a word which is closely connected
with it in sense, and ends in an open syllable. Examples : f"U7!J7
Vlh and not ^Pi ; njp irpi and not ^$3. (see also end of 13).
(2) I n t h e middle of a word, after a silent XIJP. E x a m p l e s :

T3TK (and n o t ISTX); itfP
B.
(and n o t / i h ^ ) .
The Strong Dogesh occurs in all letters except TjMl'PTX,
and indicates t h a t t h e letter is to be doubled in t h e p r o n u n ciation.
This doubling of t h e letter (1) modifies t h e m e a n i n g
of t h e w o r d ; or (2) indicates t h a t t h e letter w i t h t h e Dogesh

s t a n d s for t w o letters, for itself and for a letter t h a t h a s been
dropped.
E x a m p l e s of (1), to be found in t h e conjugations of t h e
V e r b and in t h e N o u n s .
Of (2), SiDpH instead of htS^Xl.
The
3 is assimilated to t h e p , and t h e doubling of t h e p is expressed

b y a Dogesh.
Notes on the Dogesh,(1) The dot that appears in a H at the end
of a word, is called p^59 (i.e., bringer out of the sound), and causes
the H to be distinctly heard. I t is chiefly used with the 3rd feminine
singular of the pronominal suffixes, in the sense of her. Example:
PTD-ID her horse. It is also used in other forms, as n * n | high,
and panted.
(2) The Strong Dogesh is occasionally used for the purpose of
improving the sound of a letter, and is then called the Euphonic or
Emphatic Dogesh*
E x a m p l e s : - n r f f f l B (Gen. xii. 18), ^
Sfettp
(Exod. xii. 31).
(3) When a letter has a Strong Dogesh^ and a N}tp below it, this
NJtp must be a sounding NW.
(4) The Dogesh is omitted in a ? (with a W ) ,
înstead 'of ^"*0), ^ H (instead of" T^-)-
Examples: "lrfjn
* Also called connective or conjunctive Dogesh.
THE VOWELS.
(5) For the changes of vowel caused by the letters "V^TTn'H not
admitting a Doge&h (see 15, p. 13).
nip"} (i.e..feeble, soft)Ts a horizontal ]ine placed over a letter to
denote the absence of a Dogesh or a P11?^, where either might be
expected. It is now rarely used. See Exod. ii. 3, WS^n,* rhpHJ-li.
11.
JHO Metheg ().The JHfi (i.e. bridle) is a small vertical
line placed under a letter, and serves as a check upon the

reading by preventing hasty combination of
consonants.
Thus: nSfiJjS is to be read with long yop and sounding *0>,

ko-t e -lo, (ka-t e -la); without the jriib the word would be kot-lo,
(kot-la), with short pj3 and silent xv^.
(1) It is always placed before a Compound fcop ( 9, p. 7).
Thus: hhxb, ribv$.

(2) The K}> under the letter after a Jfi is a sounding KU?.
(3) Its place is usually on the third syllable, before the
accented syllable. Thus: ^SDiO, riB>\
12.
Zptif
Makkef, is a short line placed between two words,
the first of which is unaccented (see 13).

so joined are treated as one word.
The two words
Examples:"flXPrrW},
Ji-
IS.
The Accents.Most words have the Accent or stress upon
the last syllable.
In this case, the accent is called j n S o (i.e.,
* The Dogesh in the V is an Euphonic Dogesh.

-j- i.e. Bringing near one to the other.
10
from below).
When the accent is upon the last syllable but
one, it is said that the accent is
(i.e. from above).
Examples:Of Milra: S * n j ? \ DnSD ; of Milel: PintoSfi,

T??? - Byfchesign , the place of the accent is here indicated.
"* In the Bible there are certain signs, above and below the
words, that show the manner of chanting the text.
These
signs are called Tonic Accents (ni3*JJ), and are usually placed
upon the syllable that is to be accented.
There are two systems of Tonic Accents, the first used for
all the books of the Bible, except Psalms, Proverbs and J o b ;
the second, used for these three books only.f
Each system consists of two main classes :
A.
A.
Disjunctive or Distinctive Accents.
B.
Conjunctive Accents.
Disjunctive Accents separate the words one from the
other, in various degrees ; some are used like our full-stop,

colon and semi-colon; others like the comma, or even lesser
degree of separation.
* The remainder of this paragraph, and likewise 14 and 15 should be
omitted by beginners.
f These books are usually called the il'E'N *H ? p The word iTE'N is made
up of the three initials : N=ni^7bJ, B ^ b t t f e Proverbs, n=U*7TlF\ Psalms.
THE VOWELS.
Of the first system,* the following

Disjunctives:
11
are the
principal
(a) pV?D (~) always placed under the accented syllable

of the last word in a verse, followed by the sign
p^lDS WD ()> {i.e. end of the verse), like ovx full-stop.
Example :Gen. i. 1, : ' p X H .
(b) XflmnX ( - ) divides the verse into two parts like
our colon.
Example: Gen. i. 1, DVT?i$.
B. Conjunctive Accents join the words closely together in

meaning.
The principal Conjunctives are :
(a) nyiO ( 7 ) .
Example :Gen. i. 2, J3$, P i n ] .
(b) ^&T\ti (7).
Example :Gen. i. 9, HIlPlO .
(c) T)p
ExampleGen. i. 1, HN,
(-).
f\tl).
Influence of the accents upon the Weak Dogesh.

In 10 the Rule is given, that when a word ends in an
open syllable, and the following word begins with one of the
* Disjunctive Accents.\,
p ^ p - . 2. n:ns or xnmnx-. 3. *W or
artao , 4. rhy) i . 5. Vn| ?]PT A . 6. ibj? ^ t A. 7. an?in 7 .

8. J W 1 - . 9. Ni?1!!. 10. KB^B A. 11. 3 ^ 7 .
12. ^357.
13. en* A 14. D?KnH-. 15. T t ? - . 16. n-iB\JTB^. 17. KB>ty?
n j n a A.
18. WVllh m-10 I 7 .
The stroke after the a is called p^p?.
Conjunctive Accents. 1. rU-IB 7 .

n^B?7.
5. K i l l 7 .
2. ^?n 7 .
3. ?"] 7 .
4. ?")
6. K^? or KDng JL . 7. n|Bj? fc^fl A . 8. H I J 7 .
12
letters JYS'D'f J'!!, this letter cannot take the Weak Dogesh
(see p. 7).
When, however, the first word has a Disjunctive Accent,
the second word does take the Weak Dogesh in its first letter.
Example:Gen. i. 27, DHK * n a HJjM* IDT.
According to Kule in 10, since H^lMI ends in an open
syllable, the next wrord should be N ^ (without the Dogesh);
but, as POM5! has the Disjunctive Accent Knsp, bt*\3, retains
its Dogesh.
Other examples: aMfi x S but, a j j n * 6 ; niTfi DTll
but, Dân mm.

14.
K e ri a n d K e s i v ( K e t i b ) n p a n d
yf\2.
On the margins of the Bible, a different reading is sometimes given to that which is in the text.
The new reading,
which is to be substituted for that in the text, is called ^j5

(which means, that which is read); the word in the text is
called the ^T)2 (that which is written).
Examples:Gen. viii. 17, the 1 ^ 3 is NXIPl (with a 1); on
the margin, the ^ p is given as XX^n (with a *).
Leviticus xxv. 30, the ^H-D is X7 not, but the **1p is 17 to
him, giving quite a different meaning.
In reading the Bible, the H p is adopted.
THE VOWELS.
15.
13
Changes in Vowels.
The many changes that take place in Hebrew vowels form
a rather complicated subject, but only the most important

points are given here :
1.
Owing to the fact that the letters "Vj^PTfYN do not take
a Dogesh, the following changes of vowel occur under the

letter preceding the Guttural:
H$*
becomes . Example:
~ or )
2.
..
_orV
"
.. *
j>
becomes flNKl.
T "
TW
- T&-
*l5?N
ipvx.
When words are lengthened, the first vowel is frequently
altered.
Thus: when the long vowel y^PT *s under the first
letter, it becomes a sounding KVf; or, if the first letter is a

Guttural, a Compound &oi$\ Examples:*\yi becomes D'H^PT
(not bnyp; hnz, nSnf; pan, mapir.

3.
If two &W come together at the beginning of a word,
the first one is changed to a jbi? Pjn,
Thus: the preposition 7
has ordinarily the vowel kjte> ; but, if it is prefixed to a word

commencing with a N)>, it becomes
h. Thus: nfcbvh to
Solomon, and not H

4.
When forms occur at the end of a verse or clause, such
14
STUDENT'S HEBREW GRAMMAR,
as is marked by a p-^p or NnrOTK, ^

lengthened. Thus:
&p&
becomes
P e n u ltimate vowel is
TTp^lD becomes ^Dffi
WW
V?t?D becomes J|7tpp

These are called Pausal forms (i.e., forms at a pause).
5. The following vowel changes, under various circumstances, should also be noted :
becomes . Example : T hand, T_ the hand of.
DX mother, *ftit my mother.

,:
16.
'
he icill slay, T?23p* he will slay

,:,T,:
"
thee.
Radical and Servile Letters.
The letters of a word that form part of the Root or Stem

are called Radicals. Nearly every Root consists of three letters.
The letters that are added to express number or gender or
verbal form, or otherwise qualify a word, are called Serviles.
The Serviles modify the meaning of the word and form the
inflection. When Serviles are added, the word is said to be
inflected.
The following are the onty letters that may used as
Serviles: aVp"! T\'W"Q }'ftvK, whilst every letter of the
alphabet can form part of the Root.
Example:
The Root or Stem is
letters n.'3'ft'n"l are Serviles.
Sfcp. The
EXERCISE.
15
EXERCISE 1. (On Chapter I.)

1.
Give the Hebrew letters for 19, 27, 31, 65, 151, 526,
6110* 7496.
2.
Give the numbers of the following :2"D , N"bp, T"ton,
rrbt&n, r n n , Y'Sttn
also the values of the words Nnrr ^ m ,
bwiar* SEE?, D^nnt&nsni, np^ Tbns ofc n.-f

3. Name the class to which each of the following letters
belongs:cnn bnpW D^wn ntf -pn^ in bstt VIN b^rr ^sb^n

\nsrr mpn mb "DTI prrs^ annns VISM nan ^tc\
4.
In the following words, state in each case whether the
V?H is long or short: - z>nn, robo, nrnnn, ^rin, riEji, nn^p*

5. Write the following words full :*\ZTW\)9 nbbtp, Drnptt,
6. In the following words, separate the open from the closed
syllables:itt^p1? nzwTi nvmn$ -TOT; wbi sittfqsririb")tobpntfb

irp?S3 ^ nnpeJip.
7. In the verses quoted in question 6, explain why the
letters H M ' T r D have, or have not, the Weak Dogesh.
* The thousands are usually written thus : 1,000 .'K; 2,000 ' 1 ; 3,000 'J, etc.
t Add together only the letters marked .
16
CHAPTER II.
17.
1.
The Article.
There is no form for the Indefinite Article a.
The Definite Article the is expressed by H (with the vowel

nns) prefixed to a word, followed by a Strong Dogesh in the
first letter of the word.
This is used for all genders and
numbers: D^D horse, or a horse, D^lDH the horse, D^DPJ the

horses.
2.
The Dogesh is omitted in the letter * when it has a Kit?,
(see 10, B, Note 3).

3.
Example :*11K* river, "Vlfc^n the river.
When the Definite Article precedes one of the letters
lyrYSl'N (that cannot take a Dogesh), the vowel under the

n becomes H or H.
17a.
Examples:^VUn, T^XH, Qpttn.
The exact rules are as follows :
(a) With N and "VIn front of N and % the rule given in

Chap. I., 15, 1 (p. 13), applies, and H becomes H. Examples:
(b) With H and V without accent.In front of H and V (with
the vowel V9l?) that have not the accent upon them, in words of
more than one syllable, the H becomes 77 (with ^ 9 ) . Examples:
17
THE ARTICLE.
(c) With H.In front of H (with any vowel except V|?)> the
H retains its T1HQ. Examples:Tinn, vOTH.
(d) With ^ . I n front of ^ (with any vowel except Vi?)> a n ( l ?
in monosyllabic words, the n has Vi?' Examples: 1 3 5 7 >
a?7, ~ ^ 7 .
(e) With n.Before 7 (with long V9i?), and H (with V^l? *)0),
the H becomes 7 . Examples : 1 ^ 7 7 > D ^ t p i n n .
In all other eases, 7 remains ; as, ttTjnrTj QV?7n.
Exceptions : QH7 those, (not, according to (c), EHH); "1-ipn ^ e
6/eW man, (not, according to (d), ^ 3 y n ) .
The nouns TT mountain, "15 bull, EV people, Yl$ land, 2H feast,
become ^ 7 7 , "5n, D ^ n , n n , 2 7 7 .
4.
When one of t h e Prepositions 3 in, with, by; 7 to, for;
3 0$, <ft&, is prefixed to t h e Definite Article, t h e following

changes t a k e place :
T h e n is omitted, a n d t h e preposition t a k e s t h e vowel t h a t was
u n d e r t h e if.
E x a m p l e :MDP! the horse,
to the horse,
contracted into M D ^ .
The1? has received t h e vowel of t h e M in place of its own.

The Dogesh in t h e D remains.
Other e x a m p l e s : 0 ^ 3 = 0 ^ 7 3 ; p K ^ p K H 1 ? .
The
contracted forms are a l w a y s to be used.

5.
N o u n s in t h e Construct S t a t e never t a k e t h e Definite
Article (see 36, 3, p. 33).
18
VOCABULARY 1.
2
-n
27^
VI*?
15
1DCT
">?D
(m.) father.
(m.) light.
(m.) man.
(f.) 0ar7&, land.
(m.) son.
(m.) lovingkindness.
(m.) &M&.
->p?
^5
V}
1
(m.) dtwtf.
(m.) bull.
(f.) /oo
cmd.
? as, like.
*? to,/on
EXERCISE 2.
A.
Translate :
1. The father.
2. The son. 8. The book. 4. And
the light. 5. Like the earth. 6. As the lovingkindness.
7. And the foot. 8. In the land. 9. To the man. 10. To
the ox. 11. In the dust. 12. Like the father.
B.
Add the Detinite Article to the following words, and

translate* :
i. afe>#. 2. nis. 3. Tft^n. 4. ofrto. 5. :n.n. 6. n#.

7. bn\ 8. "p\ 9. "Ttorj. 10. Tin. ii. brr. 12. rn.
The Pronouns.
18.
.4.Personal Pronouns.
PLURAL.
SINGULAR.
J,
com. ^ J X , *JK, 0
IF*, com. MPiJ^, UPU>
Thou% m&s. flPlX, npftt
Fbw, mas.
Z%ow, fern.
Fo^, fern.
jftX or flJFlK
2%0#, mas.
DP! or HSPI
jfte/, fern.
jn or Pl-H
PlX
DRX
For these words, sue Vocabulary I., p. 170.
THE PRONOUNS.
19
Notes:(1) The Objective (Accusative) Case, me, thee, him,

her, us, you, them, is expressed either by the word iHN (or fliH)
with pronominal suffixes {see 57, p. 57), or by the suffixes alone
(see 97, p. 107).
(2) The Possessive Pronouns, my, thy, his, her, our, your, their,
are expressed by suffixes attached to the Nouns {see 38, p. 34).
(3) *Oft and HP1M are pausal forms {see 15, 4, p. 14).
(4) The Personal Pronoun is added to the verb for emphasis.
"1DH M^H he said is more emphatic than ">N.
(5) The Personal Pronoun is sometimes joined to a pronominal
suffix to emphasize the suffix. Examples:**?S"D3 > ?5^ : ? bless me,
even me also; nriM"D5 ^ T " n ^ thy blood, even thine.
19.
B.Demonstrative
Sing.
Plural
Pronouns.
HT this,
mas.
Kînil that,
mas.
HKT this,
fern.
fc^PH that,
fern.
n ? X these,
com.
DPl/l those,
jnn
Notes:(1)
those,
mas.
fem.
^ this, com. is found in poetry only.
(2) When joined to a Noun, the Demonstrative Pronoun is placed

after the Noun, agreeing with it in gender and number, and both
words take the Definite Article, Examples:This book, mas. sing.
n$r\ ^B71;
that woman, fem. sing. W*inn nt#tfn ; these words,
mas. plu. n^sn nnyrn; those laivs, fem. plu. )rifi rrhino.
(3) When in addition, an Adjective is joined to the Noun, the
Demonstrative Pronoun is placed last, all tliree words taking the
Definite Article. Example:This good book n j n n i & n ")$Sn.
(4) When the Noun is predicate, the Demonstrative Pronoun is
placed first in agreement with the Noun. Examples :This is* the
man, EPtfn HJ; these are* the ivords, U^D^n H^M.
* The Verb to be is frequently omitted.
c 2
20
(5) The Demonstrative Pronoun that is formed by adding the

Definite Article to the Personal Pronouns of the 3rd Person.
(6) nrft frequently means this thing. Example :n^'ilK) ivhat
is this thing ?
(7) Rarer forms of the Demonstrative Pronouns are :This ^ 0 ,
njy>n, STCÔ; these %TT.
SO.
C.Relative Pronouns.
"l^K who, ichich, that, (used for all genders and numbers);
sometimes contracted into fe? or J>, (with Dogesh in next
letter) and prefixed to a word. Examples :nftKfcJ* which thou;
ichich is to me, which is mine.
For use of Relative Pronouns with Prepositions, see 26,
page 24.
For n used as a Relative Pronoun, see 92. C, 4, p. 101.
21.
D.Interrogative Pronouns,
*ti who ? (used for persons). I H& what? (used for things).
HO is also sometimes "HO (followed by a *|j?.c), or f!&.
means to whom ? whose ?
*u?
VOCABULARY 2.
nt7S
^y\
0*n:^T
OV
C^D
D^D
(f.)
(m.)
(pl.)
(m.)
(m.)
(pl.)
woman, wife.
word.
words.
day.
horse.
horses.
n-jim (f.) /aw.

nvrin (pi.) laws.
uy$W heaven.
^t?D (m.) r a m .
C>"i?p (pl. m.) books.
nfcri5 (Vb. 3rd pers. mas.
sing.) and (As) said.
Dn^?W Abraham.
P^V. Isaac.
-3pS> Jacob.
THE PRONOUNS.
21
21a. Rules of the syntax of a Verb.1. A Verb agrees with

its subject in gender and number; and the Verb usually stands
first. Examples:T\Wti *1&K*1 and Moses said; D H ^ N IfiN*!
and Abraham said.
2. If the subject is not expressed by a separate word, it is
contained in the form of the Verb and the Pronoun of the
Person, Gender and Number denoted by the Verb is used.
Thus: "lfifc^l, being 3rd person mas. sing., is translated "and
he said," tbtffll, being 3rd person fern. sing.,,, means "and
she said."
8. The Verb to be, in all its parts, is very frequently
omitted, and should be added in translation. Thus: DPH1X ^ X
I am Abraham; D^DPl npit these are the horses.
EXERCISE 3.
A.
Translate:
n^B ^ 4. n n y r o nbw 3. JCIN ^ 2. TI^TI HE 1.

^P25 ""^"i 8. a^Hn nn 7. sînn ni>:n e. n-rn ci*n 5.
->?5>n 11. vi.M2 Di-isn D > 8 ^ 2 ^?>* 10. Din nj 9. on >p
n-rn nsn ^ b 13. nbsn o n ^ s 12. nri-tn r n i n m n-m
v -
T -
v T
: -
***
*">tf*:! 16. Yl*?a IB?W wnn nwn 15. nri-tn nttfsn ^p 14.
.Tyb n^w-nn is. is? nri-T-ne 17. njrbn ^ n >p c r r n s
B.
Translate :
1. Who art thou ? 2. This is the woman. 3. Who is
that woman ? 4. These laws. 5. And he said, That man
is Isaac. 6. Like this word. 7. What are these books ?
8. This is the book. 9. Who is she ? 10. These words
are in the law. 11. Whose book is this ? 12. And Moses
said, Who am I ? 13. In those books. .14. I am Jacob,
and that man is Abraham. 15. And the man said, The
horses are in the rain.
22
22.
Particles.
SECTION
The t e r m Particle includes all Prepositions, Adverbs, Conjunctions, a n d Interjections.

A n Inseparable P a r t i c l e is one t h a t is a l w a y s a t t a c h e d to a
word, a n d forms p a r t of t h e w o r d itself.
#S,
T h e r e are four Prepositions t h a t are inseparable, viz.:

3 , 7 a n d ft.
23.
3, 3, h a r e pointed w i t h a few.
Exceptions:(1)
When the preposition precedes a letter with a
&V0, the rale in 15, 3, p. 13 applies. Examples:HID$2 (not
iTtetp^) in names, ntotp? (not ntotj??) like names.
(2) When the preposition precedes a Guttural with a compound
WJ^, the corresponding short vowel is used. The corresponding
short vowel to nnz n&q (-:> is ring c - ) ; to VPi? *)rj ( o is vpt?

jbjj ( r ) ; to VfcH? ^ 0 () is bi^D (v). Hence, ^ t f (not ^W^3)in
which; SttPblS*? (not ^ V ^ ^ ) to Elisha; ^ n b (not *?qS) to sickness.
(3) The preposition in front of the Definite Article, causes a
contraction {see 17, 4, p. 17).
(4) The vowel V9f? 1S a ^ s 0 frequently used. Thus : HJ2 in this,
to safety; and especially before accented syllables, as ^$"1?
to inherit, nrtfrj fo ^ ^ e ; so also before infinitive forms of one
1
syllable, as rap ? to arise* nw?b to go out.
(5) Note the following peculiarities: nbb to say,
like
God, n-fimb
toJudah.
24.
P r o n o u n s are added to t h e preposition in t h e form of
suffixes {see 38, p. 34).
3.^3 ^
we
>
Suffixes. T | 3 m ^ / ? ^ ,
IT3 in thee,
com.
mas.
fern.
^33 in us,
com.
D33 w ^/ow, mas.

| 3 3 *w 2/ow,
fem.
*|3 w Aim.
D3 or DP13 wtfAam,mas.
Pi 3 w Asr.
{PI3 in them, fern.
* Pausal forms of *|3 and ?|7 are ^3 and IjT5
PARTICLES.
7.v to me,
with
ith
Suffixes.
23
com.
XD to usy
com.
mas.
D37 to you,
mas.
fern.
' p 7 to you,
fern.
ixe6
- Tp 0 to thee,
*TJ7 to thee,
to them, mas.
*)7 to him.
JPH to them, fern.

TD to her.
3.3 is lengthened to 103, in most of its forms, before
suffices,
adding the pronominal suffixes :
*}03 like me.
^ 0 3 #A# MS.
TJ03 like thee, mas.
D33 ^ 0 2/0w> mas.
*H03 ^'Ae thee,
fern.
J33 #0 2/ow,
fern.
^DOS #Atf A//??.
DH03 or DH3 #Z# them, mas.
H03 #Ae /2r.
JH3 or n3!l3 like them, fern.
Observe the idiom: T|03 *0O3 i" -^ like thee ( = l i k e me,

like thee).
2 5 . "JO (always followed by a f]i?), or 0 (always followed
by a Dogesh, to compensate for the omission of the J), from,
out of. Thus: From Moses, nfc?0"JO or n&?00.
Before a Guttural ($00 15,1, p. 13) 0 becomes 0 . Example:
JJ^NO from a man.
0 . ^ 0 0 /row w.
with
Suffixes,
^tOO (;|00pausal) from thee,m.

"HOO /row thee, fern.
^1300 from us.

D30 from you, mas.
J30 from you,
fern.
*l300 /rom /MM.
DPlO /rom êw, mas.
(1300 from her.
JPlO from them, fern.
* Pausal forms of T|3 and *|p are ^2 and "5|?.
24
"}J& (tt) with the Definite Article, ISDHO from
the book.
The H does not take a Dogesh, therefore the vowel under the
0 is nv ($# 15,1, p. 13). More frequently, the fuller form "ftp
is used before fl.
Thus : ^SEpPn|ft.
Section II. of the Particles, see 56, p. 56.

26.
Use of the Relative Pronouns with Prepositions and Adverbs.
An ordinary sentence is turned into a relative one by merely

prefixing the Relative Pronoun *1^N, without altering the
sentence.
Thus: 121 in him; i2l I ^ X in ivhom, (which is the
same as ^ X 2 l ) ; )h IWit to whom; )2lpZ
^ J N "l^X in whose
midst I am.
So also with Adverbs: D> T H David is there, IVl DJ> "lEW
where David is; T\12!$ thither, T\HX^ *1^K whither.
VOCABULARY 3.
n?3
TfÊ
7if?K
TH
n"Jtt?
Dtp
(m.) house.
(m.) King.
(f.) Queen.
David.
Sarah.
#^re.
D? aZso.
D5...DI both...and.
n&tf thither.
v3 aW (for all gend. & num.)
7fl?l and ât> (3rd mas. sing.)
njW a ? ^ fo#& (3rd mas. sing.)
Observe the order of the words in the following sentences:

HH V P?*5 and David gave to me; ^7fif! I1? Hjp*1 tfwd ^ e 7aw#
ft>0& /or himself
EXERCISE.
25
EXERCISE 4.
Translate :
nwft cnb 1^*5 3. en DS s^n 25 2. winn y^sn-]? l.

^p nn nb -iri*5 6. rr-jn n ^ n bs Tjb 5. ^VeflH np 4.
Tjb^ *[bs 9. ^ - n o 8. nbsn D*psiDn ^b 7.
^s
nt^ ib rri?*i 11. ia nsbftn -law n>n man 'pb 10.
M-in 14. ^b -i^-b^l ^s *yb 13. cpbi ^b-np Tjb^n insi 12.
05? D3 ^ D2 16. -ininp ^rriss i n ^n ~iN*i 15. ny? nb
.\n.Nnb?:? fbp ^ 18. ib ntrs-b?p ^ s sn nb ]n*i 17.
Translate:
1. These books are for me and for you.
like you.
( = to thee).
2. We are
3. That man is in the house which is thine

4. From Moses unto Moses, who was like
Moses ? 5. Like thee, like David.
6. And David took
the horses for himself ( = f o r him).
7. Thou art like a
king. 8. All this land will be thine ( = u n t o thee). 9. And

the king gave unto us.
them (m.).
10. And the man took from
11. I am like a father to him.
took from me a sword.

that are for you.
13. These are all the books
14. Mine is all the earth.
Moses said unto us, This is the law.

a wife for himself.
12. And he
15. And
16. And Isaac took
26
CHAPTER III.
Nouns and Adjectives.
27.
Nouns.*
Gender.There
are two Genders, Masculine and Feminine.
N o u n s t h a t are of both Genders are said to be of t h e Common
Gender.
There is no Neuter
Gender.
I n English, t h e Gender of a N o u n is decided according to

t h e meaning of t h e word.
I n H e b r e w , t h e Gender is usually decided according to t h e
form of t h e word.
A Feminine Noun usually ends in T\ ( w i t h poj? in front of
t h e n ) or n , as HEAD, H ^ P l ,
ftdpfi,
Ynif
T h e absence of t h e H or fi usually denotes a

Noun, as M D , "D, " D ^ -
Masculine
N o u n s ending in H are Masculine.
The Gender of some nouns is determined by their meaning, as

in English :
(a) Masculine.Names of nations, rivers, mountains, metals and
months are usually Masculine.
Examples :12S1E [the people of)
Moab; bfcnC^ Israel; H i ? Euphrates; V^7 Lebanon; 2/7T gold;
"TJM. Adar; ^ 5 $ Abib (the ancient name of the month Nissan).
(b) Feminine.Names of countries, towns and members of the
body are usually Feminine.
Examples:CH5 Persia; D^tET^
Jerusalem; "P hand; /2T).foot.
Chief exceptions: Masculine are,tt?M"lhead; ^B mouth; nb and
heart; t)& nose.
* The formation of Nouns is treated of in 45.
NOUNS.
28.
27
Number.There are three Numbers:

(1) Singular.
(2) Plural.
(3) Dual.
(3) The Dual expresses things that exist by nature or art

in pairs, as hands, eyes, tongs. Also in a few other expressions,
as two years, hvo days.
Masculine Nouns form their plurals by adding D**- (with
the vowel h)!* PTD).
Examples:D*|D horse, D*D*lD horses;
*li2l3 warrior, DH153 warriors.

Feminine Nouns form their plurals by substituting Hi for
H.
Examples:PlCflD mare, JTlMD mares; PHIft laiv, JTnift
laws.
29.
The Dual is formed by the termination D^T for both
Genders. Examples:DV day, mas. sing, U*)2V two days, dual;

T hand, fern, sing, D^T hands, dual.
If the Noun ends in T\, the letter is first changed into H,
and then D^ is added.
Examples:p|}# year, D*r\3E> two
years; H S ^ Up, OTlSS? Ups.

Note.1. E? water and BÊtt? heaven are not Dual forms.
2. There are no Dual forms in Pronouns, Adjectives
or Verbs.
28
EXERCISE 5.
A.
Give the Genders of the following Nouns, and the

reasons for the same. (For the meanings of the words,
see Vocabulary p. 170.)
l. reriN. 2. DH?9. 3. 7Tp_. 4. B?S. 5. ttfin.

6. Trpti. 7. n^n. 8. 1*K 9. bsn?. 10. Vrs. n . 71s.
12. m ^ ? .
B.
Turn into the Plural, with translation:
1. n|>D. 2. r m . 3.TH. 4. nbîn?. 5. VS. 6. n3>?p.

7. "V??.
C.
8.
ttft^tt.
Turn into the Dual, with translation :
1. V^n. 2. njjbp. 3. HEN. 4. n>in.
30.
1.
Note on the Plural of Nouns :

If the first vowel in a Noun is YQ\>, it is changed into a
K}2> when forming the Plural, or adding any suffixes
(^
15,2, p. 13). Examples:TJ3B, pi. DH'pS; JMStt, pi. D W .

2.
If the first letter is a Guttural, nriB tjBn takes the place
of the xw
T
T h u s : DDH, pi. D*MH.

T
-r
*-
-;
EXERCISE 6.
Turn into the Plural, with translation :
i. ^55. 2. -i?j. 3. bate. .4..Q^5. 5. bii|. 6. bbrr.

7. vn$. 8. TO?.
ADJECTIVES.
31.
29
T h e P a r t i c l e 1 and, but.
1. In front of a letter with a vowel, the ) is pointed a K}&?

as, D^DJll and the horse.
2. In front of a Guttural with a compound KIB^ the 1 takes
the corresponding short vowel (see 23, 2). Examples:fifiJO
and truth ; Ifttitl) and an ass.
3. In front of a KV^, or one of the Labials (ft'fi'VS), it is
written ) . Examples:ytt) and with all; T]u?W*[ and Solomon ; *W?ti) and a king.
4. In joining words that occur in pairs, ) is sometimes
used. Examples:D.*fil DlY? bread and water;
DV day
and night.
5.
For the use of 1 with the Verb, see 90, p. 92.
32.
Adjectives.
1. Adjectives have four forms, Masculine Singular and

Plural, Feminine Singular and Plural.
The terminations for these forms are the same as for
Nouns. Examples:
Mas. Sing.
Fem. Sing.
i t o good,
DT high,
PQitD
PUT)
Mas. Plural D^lft
&&}
Fem. Plural HQ1JD
Mto1!
2. Adjectives are placed after the Noun.and agree with it

in Gender and Number. Examples:lift MD # #00^ for**;
30
PD1t3 PlEfiD a good mare;
D^litD D^lD good horses; JliD^lD
JYftitD good mares.

The same agreement exists between Adjectives and Pronouns, the Adjective being usually first. Example:FIX r Q i b
thou (f.) art good.
3.
If the Definite Article (PI) is prefixed to the Noun, it is
also placed before the Adjective.
Example:!lit3H D^lDH the
good horse.
4.
When the Adjective is predicate, it may stand either
before or after the Noun, and does not take the Definite
Article.
Thus: iitO D^DH or D^lDH HitO the horse is good.
5. For rule of Adjective and Demonstrative Pronoun, see

19,(3).
6.
If the first vowel in the Masculine Singular form of
an Adjective of more than one syllable be a yE|j it is changed

into a tt}^, when the terminations are added, (as in the Noun,
see 30, p. 28).
Examples:SH3 big, great, T&\1Z, D ^ H | ,
rnbni; p?n strong, npjrj,* ffprrj, nipjn.

33. 1. .All Adjectives may be used as Nouns: ^|0 a good
man ; H^ltO a good woman; jDT an old man.
2.
Adjectives have no Dual forms.
The Adjective in the Plural agrees with the Dual Noun:

ffiiltOjpn DH^H the two small hands.
* See 30, (2), page .28.
ADJECTIVES: USE OF J")K.
31
('>''
34.
c/
Adjective is expressed by the Positive form of the Adjective
Comparison of Adjectives.The Comparative Degree of an
followed by 0 (with its Dogesh), or "JJ5 W*w.
Examples:
n H D 2 t o (or niTJJb) faster *Aa David; B ^ f i pIMO s r t r

y
f
than honey.
;
The Superlative Degree is expressed (1) by adding the word

nft very, or ntffi 1$} or 1Kb IXti;
(2) by prefixing 3 (fol-
lowed by Dogesh) to the Noun in the Plural: D*Dttfi ^Hil

tf/^ biggest horse (lit., big among the horses); (3) by adding
73fi than all: D ^ D / l ?3? / H 5 bigger than all the horses, (i.e.,
the biggest horse).
The use of Adjectives with inflected Nouns, see 43, p. 38.
35.
Rule of the Object (Accusative) ofter Transitive Verbs.The
Noun governed by a Transitive Verb takes the word ~T)ii

(or HX) before it. Thus : Dip&PTJlX tfl*) and he saw the place.
Note."HX (or HX) is only used, (1) when the Noun has
the Definite Article; (2) or, has a Pronominal Suffix; (3) or,
is in the Construct state (see 36); (4) or, before Proper
Nouns.
In the Biblical text, Htf is used when with a Tonic Accent,
(see 13); "H^ when followed by a PJJSIB.
For other usages of "HX or HK, see 57, p. 57.
32
EXERCISE 7.
A.
Translate:
n\>^ri n^Dn nrprq 2. nisan-nsi minn-ns ib-jj-i^* 1.

iew'ai n^rrpn 0*^330 bs-riN nto np?y* 3. oniann-ip
]Dfcj5 THE ni HD 5. M^nn cipips D^n D^p 4. cnb
nnito nri-rn rninn 7. D ^ 5 S 9 Q^ ^ ^$p pjn ^p 6.
b?-ns bnan if^n nbgfti* 8. Ywi? T? -^b son rnint^
nbii} nn?5 nan îipn s^?n -IENM 9. Dip^n-p nr>Tp?n
TH ni* 11. nkw?7 niacjpn ninygrr ninito 10. ^TO:
-ns ni^n ^jn ^b 75^ 12. nip Tyb^n -g? cipsn-ntf
ib n?B"b?"ny ?p-rn Tjbpn -lab 70*1 13. nbsn D^-^bn
tthsn -p 15. *T'HS *T2 ^B )Ut N2 ri^3 *M nbfri DV 14.
natop ns-rn nnv^n ]6. nr^sgs ntr^ nn-rn-nî *)tj|rr-n$
-n$ wân set?^* 17. r w ? n#B nhy?rr-b39 rai& 031
Dips D ^ 5 ? Qîtan is. Y9 Ys win raits nftî n n ^ n
nnits 20. ^b ns nb iorf*i njbfcn-ntf Q?nn tjbEn *ni 19.
."nbpb n^b? *iP?n ^?W ^n-m bsp rninn rrjf?^
B.
1. This wise friend is very faithful unto me. 2. These
fishes are big. 3. And David gave* him the new robes
which were in the house. 4. The horses are bigger than
the asses. 5. What are these songs unto thee ? 6. The
commandments are holy unto us. 7. And Isaac said*
unto him, What is this great sorrow ? 8. And the wise
king gave* silver and gold unto the good woman upon
that day. 9. Who is holier than the prophet and who is
greater than the prince? 10. The fishes in this place are
very small. 11. They are the best officers in this land.
12. Moses is taller than Abraham and stronger than
David. 13. A faithful friend is better than gold. 14.
And the king sent* the faithful officers from that place
and he gave* to them horses and asses. 15. What is better than the holy law which we have ( = which to us).
* For these Verbs, see.Vocabulary, page 173.
THE NOUN.
36.
33
T h e A b s o l u t e a n d C o n s t r u c t S t a t e s of a N o u n .
1. A Noun is said to be in the Absolute state when not

joined to the Possessive case of another Noun ; all the Nouns
in previous Examples and Exercises are in the Absolute state;
even when joined by a Preposition, both Nouns remain in the
Absolute state.
2. When a Noun is joined to another Noun, the first Noun
is said to be in the Construct state; and, in English translation,
the word of connects the Nouns. Thus: T\$l2 D^lD the horse
of Moses; 0)0 is joined to PltJfo and is in the Construct state;
r\pti is in the Absolute state.
3. A Noun in the Construct state does not take the Definite Article. Thus: TWti D^lD the horse of Moses (not D^lDPl).
4. Observe the following order of words: pTHH ^ / ^ ^ ^
(not T723P1 pTHIl MD) the strong horse of the king, (because the
Adjective must follow the Noun, and ^|7SPt D^lD is considered
as one Noun).
5. The Construct state takes the place of the Genitive
case in other languages.
CHAPTER IV.
THE
37.
NOUN(continued).
T h e I n f l e c t i o n or D e c l e n s i o n of N o u n s .
Nouns are inflected or declined by adding Pronominal

Suffixes of the Possessive case {my, thy, his, etc.), The endings
are called the Inflections.
T)
34
For the application to Hebrew Nouns of the six Cases, as in

Latin (Nominative, Vocative, Accusative, etc.), see 46, p. 40.
All Nouns take the same Inflections, and may be roughly
grouped into two Divisions :
Division I.The few Nouns called Unchangeable Nouns,
that do not change the vowels of the Absolute state
during inflection.
Such are : D^D, IV, HD^lD, fTWH.
Division II.The majority of Nouns, called Changeable

Nouns, that change one or more of the vowels of the
Absolute state during inflection, as T?fi,
ate
king (not ^ t ? 0 ) ; W , "Spy? thy word (not * f m >

38.
my
S c h e m e of P r o n o m i n a l Suffixes.
A. With Nouns in the Singular.
SINGULAR.
1st com.
2nd mas.
2nd fern.
PLUKAL.
* my.
TT
^T thy.
1st com.
2nd mas.
&?7)
2nd fern.
his.
3rd mas.
\*7\
D*
3rd fern. florfl her.
3rd fern.
IT 8
3rd mas.
) or)?]
our.
your.
their.
Note.With Nouns in the Feminine, ending in Pi, this letter

is first changed into a fl before the Suffixes are added.
Thus:
^rniF) my law, from PHIF), (not ^PHID). See further below, 41.
* Rarely DH, }n; Poetic ending ID.
THE NOUN.
35
B. With Nouns in the Plural

SINGULAR.
1st com.
2nd mas.
2nd fem.
3rd mas.
PLURAL.
* my.
1st com.
Sh
2nd mas.
our.
'
your.
2nd fem.
Srd mas.
V his.
T
Srd fem.
W~
rp her.
'T~f )
f ^w
3rd fem.
Observe the presence of the * in all Suffixes to Plural Nouns.
39. Declension of a Masculine N o u n (Unchangeable).

SINGULAR
PLURAL.
Absolute. DID horse.
D^D^lD
construct. DID the horse of.
horses.
^D^lD ^
*0)Q my horse.
^ D
^TJD^D thy (mas.) horse.
horses of.
/ray horses.
"TDÎD thy (mas.) horses.
"Tf^P^lD thy (fem.) horses.
' *nD^lD % ( f ^ 0 horse.
VD^lD ^ ' s horses
ID^lD /ws horse.
rrp^lD her horses.

W^D^lD our horses,
^ W D owr /zors.
D5P^lD your (mas.) horse.
DDTflD yowr ( m a s . ) horses.
PPÎD your (fem.) horse.
\ytND
your (fem.) horses.
DD /J&V (mas.) horse.
DPPMD their (mas.) horses.
jD^lD ^0&V (fem.) horse.
jiTp^D their (fem.) horses.
P a u s a l f o r m s : TjD^lD b e c o m e s Îp^lD; ^ D b e c o m e s ^ D ;
"TJ^pijD b e c o m e s ^ D * l D .
f Poetic form ID*.
* Poetic form -1i"PD 2
36
Notes.(1) With Masculine Nouns, the E of the Plural ending is

dropped before the inflections are added; thus ^ D my horses, not
(2) The Gender of the Suffix, just as in English, is not affected
by the G-ender of the Noun; the contrary is the case in other
languages, as French, German, and Latin.
(3) The vowel ny, as in T ^ D , or YW in P ^ , or htiD in T O ^ ,
that joins the Noun with its Suffix, is called the binding or union
vowel.
40.
S i m p l e C h a n g e a b l e N o u n s (see 30, p. 28).
1. * Masculine Nouns, like NV33, *fV?>> whose first vowel is

a long ppi^ and whose Plurals are: D*X*5J, D^TpS, (with a N}B>
under the first letter), make the same change, when declined.
Thus: Tj?S the officer 0/, Const.; *Tj?fi my officer, VTp$ A&
officers. Every form, except the Absolute form, takes a x}^
under the first letter.
2.
If the last letter of these Nouns is a Guttural, before
^J, Db, p , this last letter takes a nnsi t)Bn (see Rule in 9).
Thus: ^Jtf^ *% prophet, (not
T|N*53) ;
MN*M yow prophet,
(not M^?}).
EXERCISE 8.
1. Decline in Singular and Plural, with the translation of
each form:
ttfcob,
TIED,
^ , "ite?..

each form:
s ^ j , m j ,tt?ii,^,TJJ.
* The Nouns of this kind really belong to the Changeable Nouns of
Division II., but their variation is so slight that it should be learnt at once.
37
THE NOUN.
41. Declension of a Feminine Noun (Unchangeable).

SINGULAR.
PLURAL.
Absolute. HMD mare.
JTlD^D mares.
construct. HEAD the mare of.
HID^lD the mares of.
^HDID my mare.
TflDID my mares.
thy (mas.) mare,
TpHiWD thy (mas.) mares.
thy (fern.) mare.
T n i M D thy (fern.) mares.
IJIDÎD his mare.
VJliDffi his mares.
nriD^lD her mare.
PlTTlMD her mares.
^Jlp^D our mare.
^JTlMD our mares.
DDfiP^ your (mas.) mare.
D^^niWD your (mas.) mares.
jDflP^lD your (fern.) mare.
p ^ D ^ l D your (fern.) mares.
DMD^D their (mas.) mare.
DITJTlD^D their (mas.) mares.
'
{HWD their (fern.) mare.
jrVfliMD their (fern.) mares.
Note.The Pi of the Absolute Singular form of the Noun

becomes fi in inflection.
Pausal forms: Wlpffi becomes
'TjnpilD; srmO becomes TliMD.
EXERCISE 9.
each form:
nbsn, min, rns, mi\

42.
Some Masculine Nouns take the Feminine termination
in the Plural, as, Dlpfi place, r t o l p f i ; "11X0 light, HHlKfi;
38
Similarly, some Feminine Nouns have the Masculine form

in the Plural, as, }3X stone, D^3N; 1 ^ city, D^tf. See also
Irregular Nouns, 55, p. 54.
43.
Rule of Adjectives with Inflected Nouns.
Add the Definite Article to the Adjective.
Examples:
l i ^ n ^ D my good horse; H i l t o n VJTniFl his good laws.
44.
Rule of Personal Pronoun being added in

sentences.
The Personal Pronoun is frequently added in sentences

containing the verb to be, although omitted in English.
The
Pronoun agrees in Gender and Number with the Noun to

which it refers.
Thus: fcOH y T\)T\ MDPl this horse is mine;

nimfin these laws are good.
The Feminine of Verb-forms.Verb-forms, that in the Masculine Singular have a \

Feminine Singular.
exchange this for a T\ in the
Thus: H/fc^l and he sent, TOPP\\ and
she sent; Yp^\ and he gave, JfiPlI and she gave.

EXERCISE 10.
A.
Translate:
b3 5.
^pJTl??1? 4.
^bw
3.
^ i p ^ P 2.
TTfcW? 1.
D^tpi-rjpn v s ^ 8. n^rribis 7. onn-i^s e. qbian l y p

.îpp-bs n-iQn-n^ n ^ n s n nbtprii- 10. nnin^n in}s 9.
* For these Verbs, see Vocabulary I., page 173.
THE NOUN.
39
^nia? n;g 2. an a^pr ns-tn \nn îiM b | i.

bs-ritf aî Q^TPSn niDq-bs-ritf rri??i 3. T y i s n*si
nnrirn* nsb^n rrpttt-n^ nj&ipn nn?2n yitt?rii* 4. DJTD-ID
*p^? bpi D ^ i s n bs bs nnw p^s 5. Y9 IV sin nairo
.a^s>p;j atj? -i$$ ni3Dn n*N 6. ^b ?n rrh,^
D^PIDLT
C.
Translate:
1. My asses. 2. The asses of my friend.
3. Our
burnt-offerings. 4. Thy ( / ) welfare. 5. Her daughtersin-law. 6. In the place of the mighty men. 7. My
statutes and his commandments. 8. The maidens of the
queen. 9. The righteous princes of the land. 10. You
are my witnesses. 11. In his might. 12. His laws and
his good statutes.
D.
1. And Abraham saw* all the princes of the king.
2. We are the mighty men of David. 3. And he said*
unto my friends, Ye are strangers to me. 4. The
prophets of the sanctuary are more holy than all the
nobles of the king and all his princes. 5. The righteous men of this land are more holy than its ( / ) prince.
6. The prayers of the elders are for the peace of the
king. 7. Who is more holy than the prophets of the
sanctuary ? 8. And Moses took* all the burnt-offerings
from the place. 9. And he said unto David, Thou art
more righteous than I. 10. And the prophet gave* bread
and water unto all the mighty men of the king. 11. And
the old prophet said* unto him, Also I am a prophet like
thee. 12. And my good friend gave* unto the sanctuary
these candlesticks of gold.
40
45.
F o r m a t i o n of N o u n s .
Nearly all Nouns are derived from the Roots of Verbs.

There are two main classes of Nouns:
A.
A.
Primitive Nouns.
B.
Derivative Nouns.
Primitive Nouns consist of a few
Nouns that are
not derived from any other words or known Verb-roots.

Examples:]3N father;
B.
DX mother; D*lD horse.
Derivative Nouns comprise the majority of Nouns that
are derived from other Nouns or from Verb-roots.
These
Nouns are formed in two ways :

(1) By taking the Verb-root and altering the vowels,
without adding any letter.
Derivatives.
king ; from
These are called Simple
Examples:From T?ft to reign, ^h'Q

to eat,
food.
(2) By adding to the Verb-root, one or more of the

letters Y^fi'J'&'N'Pl (called the Formative letters).
Examples:From
dominion; from
queen,
kingdom,
food; from PlTl
to be angry, |*nil anger.

46.
Cases of Nouns.Special forms of the Nouns to indicate
Cases, as in Latin, do not exist. The six Cases may, however,

be represented as follows:
THE NOUN.
41
Nominative: D^lD horse.

Vocative: D^lDH 0 horse ! (see 56, c. p. 57).
Accusative : WDPTfiK the horse.
Genitive: Put the preceding Noun in the Construct state.*
Dative:
to a horse (web
to the horse).
Ablative : D^Dfi from a horse.

Pronouns are declined similarly :
Nominative and )
Tr
L.
\ *tot, nm i, thou.
Vocative:
' ":
Accusative : Tltf, WW* me, thee.

Genitive: >W, h ^ K , t ^ S I B W t of me, of thee.
Dative: *7, *Tf7 to me, to thee.
Ablative: ^fifi, ^\t2& from me, from thee.
C H A P T E R V.
î
-ft
'
l
DECLENSION OF NOUNS(continued).
DIVISION I I .
47.
N o u n s t h a t alter their vowels w h e n declined.
The majority of Nouns belong to this Division.

A. Masculine Forms.All the nouns in A are Masculine in
form (i.e., they do not end in T\ or T\), but several are Feminine in Gender, as p K (f.) stone; QX (L) mother; $$ (i.)ifre.
* In Post-Biblical writings, 7&; of (abbreviated from h T^'tf) is used, a s :
D-1D the horse of the king. This form never occurs in the Bible, and
the student should not use it.
f The Pronominal Suffixes more usually supply the place of the G-enitive
of the Pronouns.
tUl
?
42
48.
These may be divided into four main Classes:

Class I.Segolate Nouns.
So called because the second
vowel is most frequently a h')l$} as T?> ^p.
Some
have a nnk or p"vn in the second syllable, as /!? work,

or JVT olive, whilst others, as i y j youth, *)yfe? gate,
have nns in both syllables.*
The chief characteristic of the Segolate nouns is
that the Absolute state of the Plural has the vowêls
a w and yojj, as D ^ f t , D^fiD, D n l
When declined, the Segolates seldom retain the vowels
of the Absolute Singular forms.
Nearly all Segolates
are nouns of two syllables.

Class II.Comprises those nouns of two syllables whose
second vowel is not 713D, but which, in many respects,
resemble the Segolates.
Like the Segolate?, nouns in this Class have the KJtf
and YQPr i n the Absolute state of the Plural.
Their chief characteristic is the presence of a *W
under the first letter of every form under inflection.
* Originally, all Segolate Nouns were of one syllable only, ending in twa
vowelless consonants. Thus: ^pD, IQp, tHp, JVT *1JJ3. To avoid this harsh
ending, a helping vowel was inserted between these last consonants, which
was either a
as in *n?'D'i a n n S , as in *1JD (caused by the Guttural); or
a pT0 when * was the second consonant, as in JVT.
43
THE NOUN.
If the first letter is a Guttural, a Compound NJif is

used in place of NJ'f. E x a m p l e s : * ^ ^ ^?C p l u r a l
Class III.Comprises nouns of two syllables that retain
the first vowel unchanged, but change the second vowel.
Examples:DTIJ? eternity; HIP! seer.
Class IV.Comprises monosyllabic nouns requiring a
strong Dogesh under inflection. Examples:Dtf people;
YT] arrow.
49a.
Changeable Nouns.Masculine.
CLASS I.
SING.
Absol.
A.
B.
king.
book.
ifte
*f?9
"1?P
^?D
my
.â
'HPP
thy
*F?^&
11?9
Absol.
oôbp
nnap
Const.
^bo
my
^b^f
Const.
c.
youth.
nP5
^53
^53
T]23
D.
E.
F.
sanctuary.
death.
olive.
&*&
tfjP
59
JT?
rvto
^\T
^.T
ffTJ
îr?
vita
âJijj
*I/pta
D^ttHft
D\nta
^1i?
>nta
\nta
PLUR.
your
M^ba
^?3
^.53
^.?P
"nspt
nyjf
D3^.?P D7T1S3
Îl7:t
D^ttHR Q^nta
D\TJ
VT*
^TT.
n;>\rm
* The nouns like TpB, &0D3 (se 40, p. 36), partly belong to this Class,
in taking the &OE> under each first letter.
f The inflected forms from w?/ to o%/' usually take the vowels of the Plural
Absolute : thus,
^"HSD^ etc.; your and their follow the Construct
form, thus, DrVD^D, D i n S D , etc.
44
49b.
CLASS I I .
A.
B.
c.
D.
SING.
word.
wise wzaw.
o/e? man.
Absol.
^
^
nyt
Tjyi
field.
nib
nip
^
Const.
my
thy
D?rr
m
ra?
Qpq
*gp.T
^?q
W 3
*T?P?
pmb
'FTP
his]
PLUR.
my
D^n^
.^.3n
nyt
your
Dp^P' 1 !
Absol.
Const.
49c.
SING.
Const.
my
thy
Q^BT
rrnip
^?r\
î??
^PT
Qp\3pT
*i&
to^TP
'SpO
Dp^pn
49d.
CLASS I I I .
A.
Absol.
D^ppq
B.
eternity.
enemy.
obis
obis
*>pbi2
Tjpbis
^K
^K
*iv
CLASS IV.
c.
A,
B.
c.
seer.
SING.
people.
arrow.
statute.
njh Absol.
n?h Const.
nn my
nv
02
YU
ph
rn
PO
^pn
*ipn
I?1!'**
thy
>KV
r]7pv
?n
*T-?n
pnjh
Aw]
PLUR.
PLUR.
o^bis
^bSs
EW'H D>th
\?n
Const.
"W'H
^n
my
W'M
your
Dysjbis D^vyrh M ^ n
Absol.
Absol.
Const.
my
your
o v ^n
v
?n
D^pn
^pn
"95
S
EV
^pn
ô
v
0 ^ 8 5 P n op'pn
n*is
45
THE NOUN.
50.
Notes on the Changeable Nouns,
Masculine:
CLASS I.Some nouns with two <13D prefer P^n in inflection to
nnSl. Such are "TJ? garment, ^ 3 5 , Q ^ J S , ^ 3 9 ; '"^p ^ r a ^ , v "??p,
annp, n?p.
The plurals of n p (E) and of H\t ( F ) should be DV11&, DVTT,
according to the rule of Segolate nouns, but these forms do not exist.
CLASS II.According to the rule in 15, 3, p. 13, where two DW>
would begin a word, the first $) is changed into a P ^ n ; hence
*SF[ and not 'TOT.
The nouns on the model of n*Ttt? ( D ) retain the TPi? in most forms.
The H is dropped. These forms are similar to those of Class I I I .
(c) TV$P, and frequently have the feminine ending in the plural.
CLASS I I I . I n nouns of the ( B ) type, where the second letter is
not a % the form with the suffix of the 2nd person mas. sing, takes
the vowel too ; thus "W*, T P ? 1 \ All Participles are inflected in
this way.
CLASS IV.The characteristics of these nouns are: (1) The
appearance of the strong Dogesh when the pronominal suffixes are
added. (2) The change of the long vowels Vp> "HS and oVin
into the short vowels Hfl5 (as in A), P ^ O (as in B), and V'^P (or
]bpT V9RJ (as in c).
5 0 a . Several monosyllabic nouns do not conform to these rule*.
Such are:
1. 2$ father;
flS brother; ] ? son; i"12l daughter;
TIB mouth.
For these nouns, see Irregular Nouns, 55, p. 54.
2. ni blood, tt (const.), ^
(const.), T9"=I, V1?% 0 ^ .
3. ^H mountain,
* [ ^ , ',
E ^ .
PL D ^ ,
PI. D'Hn. p n n i s also usecl; T j r j PI. DniPJ,
4. T Aarcdf (f.), T (const.), n j , 1 1 1 , HJ, B ? T . D T T .

(see 54, 1, p. 53).
5. QV day, QV (const.), W .
PI. D ^ T , ^
Dual D>TT
(const.), (in poetry
1
46
6. VI? tree, ^?5, *[?S. PI. ^ ? 5 , ^ 5 (const.), ^ ? , T ? S , Y*??.

7. ^ 2 city (f.), ^ V (const.), ' T V .
PL D q ? , T ? (const.), q ? ,
H. tt?rfn Aearf, tt?rfi (const.), *$tin.
PL D^fcTJ, ^ttftq (const.),
vtphq, D^#*q.
9. -via? ox. PL oq5#, nid.
10. nw name, nw or -Q? (const.), ">*, *J$P, TJ$t iBtp, H t
snstp, o??tp, DBtp. pi. niagJ, ntotp (const.)', Nrit oflibtp.

11. i f r prmce, ^
(const.), q?>, Tlfc, B y W .
E X E R C I S E 11.
A.
B.
PL D q f r
(Ow J^f#iw o / Class I.J
Decline in Singular a n d P l u r a l :
n b ? (A.) nvw (C) - n j (B.) a n h p . )
"rpo (A.) w^n (F.
Translate:
irrp1? ^ i ^ n n ^ 3. n^rq?n ^009 2. *i#M br>3 i.

D^pb^n ^35 b? 6. WOWl asvjibto 5. QVb ^"H n^yn 4.
.I33iri3 10. b^nrpi ^ntp 9. ^?~)2 bs 8. VTDPI riis 7
C.
n|5?i* 3. i3"nb q?P Tfb?.i* 2. iqyj-btf cn"7? ^9^*5* 1.

nisntf DJib ] ; w o. nbbtp' nto qq** 4. Qipftn ^jnwa
l!!l 7. nj^rr ^ i n b nab s^rr jiafrq 6. Qqq ^b$
.Tf^w b?3 *rq?# b?3 8. ibn bp ^ M D^n^n-ny
D.
Translate:
1. M y sacrifices. 2. H i s vow and his oath. 3. T h e
fruit of his vineyards.
4. O u r bread and our wine.
5. Y o u r n e w g a r m e n t s . 6. M y w a y s are like y o u r ways.
7. T h e w a y s of t h e righteous are pure. 8. The k i n g s of
their land are wicked. 9. A n d his servant g a v e unto
t h e m all t h e i r books. 10. These are t h e princes of t h e
tribes of Israel.
* For these Verbs, see Vocabulary I., pasê 173.
THE NOUN.
EXERCISE 12.
A.
B.
(On Nouns of Class
47
II)
Decline in Singular and Plural:

btfte, ]3#, -1$; rojj ( p l. D^jj), 0^9 i n plural only.
Translate:
Tira^ *F3*te 3. vpjrn bsntsrj \?pT 2. n^T^n n l.

ns nnq K-351 6. bs ^n^ 5. -lâ 7353 ayiDrri 4. en ^b
"?-) n-?n s. ^7?sn ^b^n >^b vjQ-bp Vs*i* 7. lF.-tn ^5
nyr "fks TO Q^y? 10. mwb-bp ipq rnirn 9. T??1?
.D^5-b D^Q 12. r o n niip'ZL Tjb^_ 11. vbtra
C.
Translate:
1. Upon your face. 2. Our neighbours. 3. The clouds
of the glory of his greatness. 4. Our elders and our companions.
5. I have many bottles of wine.
6. And the
girl fell* upon her face to the ground.
7. The ways of
God are upright and all His words are truth. 8. All the
dead bodies were upon the face of the field. 9. His field
and his land are mine. 10. These are the proverbs of
the wise men of our king.
EXERCISE 13.
A.
(On Nouns of Class
III)
nfrs, ttnj?9, bîp, ngfs, M W .

B.
Translate :
nani 3. vs'si nn?n tjb^ >ptro 2. DTib^ *o$bft 1.

D^bii| 5. D^^n ^3?b? D^sn 4. Tywb^ nsn$5 -insn^
v??bp 8. ?paittri ^PSRT 7. n p tsstpn ibi e. ^nb# ^ E
-n$ NI*I 10. Q'Htth rrt ^9ate 9. n ^ i ^ r n D^qbn
onsi 12. Vl^m pipt^n Nib^'ntT]?^ 11. nroi&n arnfrSB
f Throughout this book, the abbreviation Tl stands for HliT the Lord.
48
C.
Translate:
1. The shepherds of Lot. 2. Unto the messengers of
the king. 3. Thy (/.) Redeemer is the Holy One of Israel.
4. Their wicked judges. 5. The deeds of our enemies.
6. The enemies of David are my enemies. 7. The camp
of the king of Syria. 8. My Creator and my Redeemer.
9. The physicians are wise. 10. And David sent all his
messengers unto his camp.
EXERCISE 14.
(On Nouns of Class IV.)
A.

E7N, n y , Vto, ON (pi. rYtetf), D^T.
B.
Translate:
bipbipn 4. nVn?n ia? 3. iyw ^SS 2. D^Mq . ^ 3 \%

^ i#*q n^ 6. pqtf ^95 bv 5. lips *T Q?l*n,j nps!
intpp-ns np*i 7. orrnya Dnbqs bs aqiott? nbsn: bsnp^
-ns npni 9. iaJri-15 i*rn ia orn b? T_ 8. i"r;s vsri-nî
.Ti?q5 ta^n ^ b ^nf 10. Q^ryn ^13 n'-to
C.
Translate:
1. My dear mother. 2. The waves of the mighty seas.
3. Great is his name in all the land. 4. Where are my
bow and my arrows ? 5. In the indignation of his anger.
6. The princes of Pharaoh and his servants. 7. What is
this blood upon thy hands ? 8. My people are like thy
people. 9. And he kept the statutes of his king all his
days. 10. And Esau said in his heart.
* Let be.
THE NOUN.
50b.
49
Further peculiarities of Nouns (not included in the
above four Classes) :

1.
P'tST remembrance, fHDT (const.), \3il5?-
2.
Nouns ending in P!; as JlV) (f.) spirit, wind, breath, HVl
(const.)., *Piri, ^Pin.
Plural D i n D .
WWti anoMed one, Messiah, ITB>a (const.), TPB>&, ^ h ^ t t .

n | T a/far, HSTft (const.), ^ 3 T 0 , ^ J O .
3.
^Hfc fetf, ^ i l , TJ^HN.
Plural M i r t ^ O ,
Plural D^PIK.
^ 5 <YWM*/, ^ O f
Plural D ^ f
pfi ftfe/rf, *3Jfc.
Plural D\?Jft.
D^?^ (used only in the plural) heaven, *fi&? (const.), ^pftfe?>

W ,
T
50c.
DOW
v
ifow to parse a Noun.
noun, from
Examples :(1)
, segolate
T ? 0 ; masculine, singular, with preposition 7
meaning to, and pronominal suffix of the 1st person singular

common.
iyi',
Translation: to my king.
(2) ^15*71, Noun from
masculine, plural, construct, with conjunction ) and.
Translation : and words of.

CHAPTER
DECLENSION OF
51a.
VI.
NOUNS(continued).
Feminine Forms.There are Three Classes of Feminine
Nouns, with changeable vowel:

E
50
Class I.These mostly end in H, a n d a r e derived direct

from t h e masculine segolafce nouns (see 48).
Thus:
queen, fern, derived from T?X5, mas.

T h e inflections of these n o u n s resemble those of
t h e masculine segolates.
Class I I . A l l these end iu PI, a n d h a v e t h e vowel fDD
or n before t h e last vowel.
I n inflection, t h i s vowel
(called t h e p e n u l t i m a t e , i.e., last b u t one) is changed.

E x a m p l e s :PlplV righteousness;
!"|JJ> sleep.
Class I I I . T h e s e n o u n s end in fi, and resemble t h e

masculine segolates.
E x a m p l e s :rnijN
letter;
skull.
51b.
Changeable Nouns.Feminine.
CLASS I.
A.
SING.
Absol.
queen.
B.
B.
reproach,
n
91C
ns^ri
PLUR.
queen.
Absol.
Const.
ntobE
my
my
VTbbB
thy
your
Const.
reproach.
nianq
nisnq
^nis-iq
THE NOUN.
51c.
51
51d.
CLASS II.
B.
c.
righteousness
cry.
sleep.
A.
SING.
Absol.
Const.
i?T?
ripis
P?
thy
letter.
SING.
Absol.
rnatf
i"W
Const.
natp
rras
my
\np^?
my
CLASS III.
thy
*rop"7S
PLUR.
PLUR.
Absol.
Const.
my
your
52.
nip7?
nipi?
vrvn?
DycviPis
nip^t
riipst
VTipSJ
Mvripjr
niattf*
niatp"
V_rtaa;
oyniatp"
Notes o?i the Feminine Changeable
CLASS I.rtzrin
Absol.
nrm
nnstf
Const.
my
your
VThSN
D^rvnaN
Nouns,
waste, pi. riinnrj.
CLASS II.The noun njtt? year has a Plural form &}$,

(const.) ; in poetry, f ^ l p , nfatp (const.) are used.
\}?J
Many nouns of this Class take the form ^ 7 7 or ^ 7 7 in the

Construct and inflected forms. Thus :
n ? b ^ p kingdom, Const. n j ^ P B , V?pb*?9.
nriQtt?ip family,
n n ' s i ^ p , \nng>tpp.
The noun ^ p l ^ ground, has the forms n^lfc? (const.), V1E1.N.

CLASS III.Like the Masculine Segolates, some nouns take
other vowels in inflection. T h u s : J ^H.5| lady, mistress: M?n2?;
rrplpto hire, reward:
^~pWK.
* rJhe plural forms of this noun do not exist.
E 2
52
Some nouns take a Yi? in the Plural absolute form. Thus :

rrffitpZ? office: PI. ninp?fe, Const, n h S t p p ; n ? 3 ring: PI.
ni^'to, Const, ni^ta.

The nouns HtpS shame,
skull, are inflected with f7?j?.
Thus: V-ltp?, ^ b ? b ? . .
The noun Hj'-J door, has Plural rrinb?, Const, n i n b n .
EXERCISE 15.
A.
(OK Nouns of Classes I, II,
III.)
nvp\ n ^ n , n^?s? n ^ , n^s, rgyt^p.

B.
Translate and parse each noun :
nitthq nibfctp 3. ^ nghVi ^fl?fob 2. irns^n Tin 1.

tjj.ibefew D^Vto bs n^b Ô^bte 5. ^sb ntatpnB 4.
. -ii"Tj n i l bp?
Translate:
1. The abomination of Egypt. 2. His vengeance is
upon the nations. 3. How precious is thy kindness, O
God, and thy righteousness to the upright (pi.) of heart.
4. From thy work upon the day of the Sabbath. 5. The
families of the tribes of Israel. 6. My thoughts are not*
your thoughts. 7. If I am your Lord, where is my glory ?
8. From thy land and from thy kindred. 9. And he took
his mantle from upon the altar of stones. 10. And he
did all these things in his anger, with wrath and with
rebukes of wrath.
53.
1.
Further Peculiarities of Feminine Nouns.

Nouns ending in ffl make their plural HI*.
Examples
:ttDS& kingdom, PL HIOSD.
(Exception: rVHS? ordinance, PI. JTHy).

2.
Nouns ending in )V make their plural Hi*.

* ?, placed first in the sentence.
THE NOUN.
53
Examples:]V3B>a picture, PL nV3E>& ; n^SS? Ammonite

woman, PL HV3QV
(Exception: n^Pl s/âr, PL H i n ^ n ) .
3. nOX maidservant, ^ n K . PL n i n N , niHfiX (const.),
Tnn&NL T
n&ns 6<?s*, ca^/r, nana (const.), ''nana. PI. ni&n?.

ni&ns (const.).
w h s or niha coat, W D . PI. nuna, nuns (const).
(const,),
(const.).
n i p eA PI. nwp.
n#J3 bow, <fi\&p. PI. nin^j?, nin^p (const.).
54.
Dual Nouns.
Nouns in the Dual form are inflected like the Masculine
Plural of Nouns. Examples :
1. T hand (f.), (see 50a, 4), Dual DH*; C o n s t - *T> * T ,
YTT> ^T> 1'T, CH!> ^T> MH.S
?'T-
2.
M 3 (/.), Dual D1&33 pair of icings; Const.
3.
S^n (/.),
^33.
rshT\
feet;
^PL
4.
p;(/.)>
Q'^y
w;
5.
}TX ( / ) ,
D^TN *ws;
^T.
6.
C|3 (/.),
*3.
^^.
D*S3 Aflnrfs;
7. nfiB>(/.), D^nfi^ %>;

and
The Nouns SjT, j?S

jtk belong to the Segolates; S]33
to Class I I . Masculine, n? to Class II. Feminine, Sj3 to
Class IV. Masculine.
iV.2?.Nouns in the Dual agree with Adjectives (see 33,
p. 30) and Verbs in the Plural.
54
55.
Irregular
These are Nouns of peculiar formation
father.
Sing.
Const.
ns
DM (or 'OS)
ON
TO*
TO
brother.
ns
^ns
>ns
Tp
^>
^ns (or -in^N) vnw (or ^n^nw)

rp?
n^ns
i3^n
wnw
Plur.
Const.
sister.
ninw
rrinb?
^ninw
TOinsi
tjnina
ininb*
nnin^
D^b?*
drmsi
drains
drprra
dphb?
fining
fpnina
q^niny
Y*/rta8
nv^bbj
soyrbs
D^^tafe?*
drpntagi*
5 5 a . Notes on the
(1) The original
HtWN. Hence the
women. The word
of the .
>nw
^nw
>nw
r^w
^HH
V
rnriH
WTO
d^nb?
drrnb?
W^
tt^N
^ N
is^tf
s
wia^M
ntt?>
lariinb?
on^5B*
nins
ntay
man.
D^3
ni>n
>ni>n (or ^ning)
TO^TO (or l^riinB)
Tpnvow (or "spninH)
Y ^ O N (or vninbf)
jrcrpns (or nyvinb*)
^ v r i ^ s (or wciing)
^38
^?8
*p#?8
Tf!tt?5B
VttbSj
rrgfciS
Wgttb*
dD^H
drpttbs
Irregular Nouns :
forms of Wy and n&N were *) (or ttfjS) and
plural d^ttfjb$? which meant both men and
for women became d^ttfS by the falling away
* The feminines of the suffixes your and their are not written out here, but
are easily derived from the masculines by changing 0 into \.
THE NOUN.
Nouns.
t h a t v a r y from t h e usual classes:
woman
house.
n$
n$s
vyitpN
rva
rps
son.
^T?
daughter.
vessel.
13
ns
"1?
n?
^3
^ 3
^s
-bs
^?
^ntp'tf
in^s
^ 3
im3
^3?
H32
nrrs
^fT3
DJiTSl
T
n^tpj
*vfe
^?
TO
^3?
a
??3
D33
T
o^na
sin^Q (or Y*B)
rpa
^5
D^B
tarns
'#
^ 3
^?
VTias
*?2>
Tni33
ijvriasi
*pbs
T^>
vbs
rnbs
VW2
rpj-igt
^#3
ôg
D?^3 a y r a i
arpttfa o n ^ a
' T
T ^
TO
voa
nâ
vnia3
nîasi
wnia?
^3?
? 33 D^crias
0^33 Dn\nia3
D N
TpQ
in?
nna
^na
E?^3
cn3
D^bs
n^?
^
^9
f???
nba
rrb3
TO
mouth.
H5
^??
"35
Tfl?
rpris
vna
ivater.
*>3
nyi
WIS
WB
D?^3
T^B
7ptt>$
Y^tt
rp^s
WE^S
3^$
DiT*??
EHÊ
^b?
ni*?
(or ^ )
The plural D^tp^S (instead of Q^tpJS) occurs only three times in

the Bible. The phrase ttf^S E^M means each man.
(2) 13 has a second construct form "13. I n poetry, the forms
^33 and *123 are also used for the construct.
(3) r i 3 was originally # 3 3 (the feminine of 13), hence the
Dogesh in the inflected forms.
(4) TIB has two other plural forms, E^B and ni>B^B.
56
EXERCISE 16.
A.
Translate
a n y ? *933 by 2. vn$Vt ittnb^ i^bi v ? ^ ^^7 1.

niaan 5. vptoss *gbtf rrits sb 4. 10ptf: 13 *R?P N^ 3.
B.
1. And he made an altar of gold and all its vessels.
2. And he gave unto him his daughter for a wife. 3. My
sons are swifter than eagles.
4. His father and his
mother are in the field. 5. Unto their children's children.
6. Each man according to the house of his fathers. 7.
Upon the houses of the children of Israel. 8. Thou and
thy son and thy daughter and thy (man) servant and thy
maidservant. 9. The words of thy mouth are holy unto
thy children. 10. The earrings of gold which are in the
ears of your wives, your sons and your daughters.
CHAPTER VII.
Particles.*
SECTION
56.
2.
Other Inseparable Particles.
11. A. Interrogative.When prefixed to a word, |"1 (or T\

when followed by a **Vf or compound &W), denotes a question,
and is called Interrogative. Examples :^fiKTlPl wilt thou keep ?
DfWTll do you know f
Note.The T\ has sometimes the vowel ^ P , as pTHPl is it
strong ? I t may be translated by whether, as DK Nfl rQiCSPl
flST) whether it is good or bad ?
* See pp. 22-24.
57
PARTICLES.
B. Local.When placed at the end of a Noun, T\ denotes

the direction towards, and is called Local or Locative. Examples :
HXIX (from p N ) towards the land, PI&HV9 towards Egypt.
C.
Vocative.H with Dogesh in the next letter, is also
used as a sign of the Vocative: T?QH 0 king.
57.
P a r t i c l e s w i t h P r o n o m i n a l Suffixes.
1.
"MX or MX, used :

(a) As sign of the Accusative Case after a Transitive
Verb; it is then not translated by a special word
(? 35, p. 31).
(b) With Pronominal Suffixes. It then forms the Accusative of the Personal Pronoun :
*flfc me.
^HX
thee, mas.
MHK y0-, mas.
^HK
thee, fem.
pHX
ifitf
him.
ftflX for.
you, fem.
DHX tffo/w, mas.

jHX
A?/w, fem.
(c) As a Preposition, meaning r#A :T
"VM watfA tffoe, mas.

^fttf
nYA zfotf, fem.
)F\it uith him.

PlftX
with her.
DDfttf
pfiN
tth Vou> m a s *
^ A ^/<?w, fem.
DFlX ^ A tfAm, mas.

jfitf
with them, fem.
58
(d) "JlNt is sometimes prefixed to the nominative to a

verb in the passive voice.
Example :TDH?
TVS?"T\X and unto Enoch teas born Irad.
H^XJTlN
is nominative to the Passive Verb

2.
W\ there is, exists, the opposite of TK (see page 61).
Examples:
X ^ 3 W\ there is a prophet in Israel.
*7 ^ there is to me, (i.e., I have). With pronominal suffixes: TfBJ^

thou art, SlX&\ he is, DpfcJ^ Vou
are
Observe the idiom : DD^S}~riX $\ it is your desire (lit. it is

with your soul).
3.
P13/T, JPI behold, lo!
With suffixes: ^liPl, (pausal form
^3H J ^ o me /) T[3Pi , 1j3H, 13P1, PI3PI, U3H, DMfl, MPI.

4.
nty yetf, ,9^7/.
With suffixes : Hty, *3lty ^ ^
^ w (or
w ) M spny, ipty sianiy, nrrty, tinty, Dpniy, Dity.

58.
1.
Separable Prepositions.
^ 3 between [between
fm^/, ^2)
^ 3 or 7
E x a m p l e s : ^ 3 ^ ^ 3 between me and thee; yb
^3-
a t o }*3 fo-
tween good and evil]. With suffixes: ^ 3 , ^ 3 , ^%
W3,
nra, ^ 3 oyrtra), D?\r3> orwa (Dnfra).

2.
DSÂ.
With suffixes: (HBJJ), ^Stf, *S|S?, etc.
8.
S^X at the side of, by.
With suffixes : ^ K , ^ V K ,
etc
PARTICLES.
59
59. The following Prepositions are used in the Plural form

when joined to Pronominal Suffixes :
4. 7X unto;
5. "lllNS behind, after;
about; 7. 1)3 until;
8. 7p upon;
6. ^!3p round
9. P,Hfl beneath,
instead of.
4.
With Suffixes: ^ X , ^ N ' T - ^ J
-^K wwfo.
^>
n\bx, WSN, D^SN, o r i g in poetry, vX mfo, lift vN unto them.

5.
nriN or n n X
fl/fcr.
With Suffixes: nPtN,
^HIIN,
^nnx, vnriK, etc.

6.
n ^ D rcw/w* about.
With suffixes: TVD^D, f H h * ? ?
(or "?|^3p), V r i l ^ n p (or V^?D), etc.

iVoite.The forms in brackets are derived from an assumed
Masculine Plural D ^ ! l P The others are from a Feminine
piurai nin^p.
7.
-ny mftV.
With suffixes: Htf, ^ H t t , Vltf, C p H g .
8. -Sy t/Hw. with suffixes: ^Sy, ^ y , ^S, vSy.rpSy,

!?, D^py, on^y.
In poetry, ^7$ upon,
9.
T\HF\ beneath, instead of
upon them.
With suffixes: ^fiftR
^nrifi) instead of me, ^PlPlfi, VPlflJ-l, D ^ n n f l .
(or
60
60.
Other prepositions with suffixes are :
i.
2.
on account of, for the sake of,

H ^ ? 3 except, H ^ S l , ^ " J V ^ , etc.
T?;.!l3, etc.
3.
y(2^
4.
l y a , I B S behind, on behalf of, H573, etc.
5.
"TtinS w tte w<fetf o/ (Const, form of the Noun "5p.Fl),
for the sake of, n t t g S , etc.
ataa, ^ n a , ipina or *p3^na, inin?, etc.

6.
TvAl besides, except, ^TyW, DZJfiTIT, etc.
7.
|y&S /or *A sae of, *Wtb,
)Nth,
MMbS.
fe/bre (lit., to the face of; Const, form of the Noun

MB).
Adverb of place: ^ ,
WJB1?,
B^lfe Drrjs'?.
9.
^^S 1 ?, "pS 1 ?, V ^ , iTOS?,
TJJ before, opposite, ' " p i , etc.

o^r against, towards, ^TOS?,
61.
etc.
Affirmative and N e g a t i v e Particles.
A.
Affirmative Particle :
$\ there is {see p. 58).
B.
Negative Particles : X7, 7tf,
(1) K7 woA Used with the finite verb, to express direct

negation.
Examples:7tDj5 A# sfcw; 7DP N? Atf flfo'd
(2) "7X mtf (always followed by a *]!?). Used only with

the future of the verb (2nd and 3rd person) in the
61
PARTICLES.
sense of prohibition, corresponding to the English do not.

The form of the future with 7X is called the negative
jussive.
See, for explanation of this term, under the
Tenses of the Verb, p. 97. Examples :/bpPl thou wilt

slay; 7bpJV 7X do not slay (a prohibition) ; vbpll $?
thou wilt not slay (a statement of fact).
(3) p * (Pausal form ptf) not.
(a) Used only with nouns and participles as the
opposite of J>\ Examples:p^'DX ftf A3 B?P)
whether there is a tree in it or not; ^JSS? EJ^N pX
there is not a man (no man) with as.
(b) With pronominal suffixes:
*3VN, ^ X ,
^tf,
wrs, na^N, urn DMW, om

Examples:D3j!np3 *$-!*$ % am nt in four
midst; D^Stf iHX HpS *3 tiJW and he was not,
for God had taken him.
Examples of p x with Participles :
SH3 ^ ^ f i P ^ ^3 /or Mordecai would not bow, was
not bowing; D\3*15?J$/b D3^X y# #r6 not believing,
ye do not believe.
(4) J3 /<?s (always followed by a *]#).
(5) ^ 7 3 7 in order not to, used only with infinitives.
(6) 7 3 is a form used in poetry only, for X7 not.
\\WQ means from nothing ; also, instead of H3SD or n*XO, whence ?
62
63.
Other Inflected Particles.
1. n*K, ^X where ? Pl3*K wA*ra art thou ? VX wA*re is he?

D*X tr Aer<? we they ?
2. !l1p3 among, in the midst of;
^SHpS M way weefetf ;
tenia, etc.
a.
nnS
/<me;
^T?
by myself alone; ^ H j ? > e t c -
(Infin. Kal of the Verb XÎD = fo we) towards;
-ranch towards me;
etc
Note.T)V2L and 121? (like ^Sfr and ^ i n ? 60) are

nouns with prepositions attached to them.
List of Uninfected Particles generally in use.
*! or.
perhaps,
&OX i beseech thee !

FUN whither ?
T T
however, but.
TNt, \TX then (TXE since).
&X e^m, also.

v 3 without.
SpN , PO^K how f

nb'N where f
/ar fo # / God forbid !

D"lt? S^/ore (adverb of time).
|?N surely, but.
hit if.
DN */.
TJfT together.
jST because.
nJPfcO w^m, as.
jN # w true ! amen !
*3 /or, w, w?Aew.
PARTICLES.
DN"*3 except, but.
63
N3, [K3X] I (or we) beseech thee (or you) !

i p y because, in reward for.
p 7 therefore.
TW7 why ?
TXfi whence ?
Vtb ?Ay ?
nb A#ra
DXllJS suddenly.
yjlS suddenly,
pi only.
^ti ivhenever.
rTirilb quickly.
T T
T\fo when ?
T&ft continually.
EXERCISE 17.
A.
Translate:
\ns D^naten nw rr3 " ^ P P QH?9 rf?% ^" W?l l.

?jb$ TN 4. nsjM ib - I S ^ I b i i | bipp vbw *np*i 3. l$n
on^bs nri*5 5. v r p bDp n:n??E ^MIS npt psn nip ]>sn
ne^^ 6. wn-'js QS'H.yT? ru-iy-os ?ipi> /rp-bs nttfy ^ s n
: ^rr toTton ]p-rn np>n^ Dibttfn 7. Efl W 5 ^ 2pg> onb
aft ]pw 9. D?$n nâ? nn D^nbw / r p nw-vs nj r 8.
^ 1 11. 1^ Q^ ^?1PP 'n* a^ry 10. n*n oipftp 'n*
p s 12. "inn 7^3!) nnan pp ntw nbiT|n n>?n-btf npip
vws&t WJ-DW 13. 'n* ilf? rv$ V#) njsofl r ^ ] n ? ? n
: Drrbst -irf*i nno^n nrwnjh MSJI 14. Di*rr T.?^P in
* Throughout this book, the abbreviation 'PI stands for PI IT the Lord.
f I have found.
64
5ptf i? 16.
^nipU? DS1] ^TOS E3 ^""T^? &12V ^2H 15.
bsnttt? ^35 ^ ^ a 17. ^ n s -la^s "i?3rr| âs-by nb?s*
nnw nnrf^ n ^ s vjs bs nbbtp bb^_ is.
obbb sin ni
: ÔBE n-jn rpaa bi-r} ^ N 19. *r-pb t^ribsn mrr
B.
Translate:
1. Is there a place in thy (./!) father's house for me and
my men ? 2. There was no man from the men of the
house there in the house. 3. My blessing shall be upon
thee, and upon all thy children who are here with thee.
4. You shall be more holy than all the nations that are
around you, for I am with you. 5. And she went after
him to Hebron, to the land of the children of Israel. 6.
For thine eyes and thy heart are not unto wisdom but
unto folly. 7. And the fool said in his heart, There is no
God. 8. There is to us an old father in the land of Israel.
9. Surely there is a God to Israel, and there is no God
like him. 10. And the king went towards the north, and
his son reigned in his stead.
CHAPTER VIII.
63.
The Numerals.
The Numerals are divided into two classes:

A. Cardinals; answering the question, How many? as one,
two, twenty.
B. Ordinals; answering the question, In what order? as
first, second, third.
* Shall I go up.
65
NUMERALS.
64a
Cardinal Numbers.
MASCULINE FOKMS.
Absolute.
Construct,
in$
F E M I N I N E FORMS.
Absolute.
Construct.
Jinx
nnx
im
(pausal f l H X )
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
&.W
nwbw
W
r\vhw
nyrix
fiEtoq
nsrs?
nv?1
n^bq
nw
nystf
n^
vfa?
v*y*
B ^
JETO
Eton
Eton
>{>
##
y3^
n.3b^
y^
py^^
nK>
ny^ri
n
W$
ny^p
n'W
V?#
DW
W
H ^
TO
Ty
*&$
Fr om 11 to 19, the mas. and fem. have one form each.

FEMININE.
MASCULINE.
.rrpy r\m
11
12
1
13
14
15
nb'y
18
19
m W DPIB>
ivy ^
ni^y w
rnb>y #?#
n-ry ya-iK
rn#>y Eton
icrr n&?W
i&y nyrix
-i?y iron
16
17
D ^
nk>y nine*
ne'y mb#
P
T
T ;
n-i^y
r w y jn&r
nnfew robs?
y yeto
66
Observe that the Masculines have been formed by adding *")?$)

10 to the masculine unit, and the Feminines by adding PHEW
10 to the feminine unit.
6 4 b . The numerals 20 to 90 end in D^, and are of common gender.
20
30
D*B>SB*
40
50
S^y
DWX
D^bn
60
B*B>#
70
D^5#
80
&$
90
own
The intermediate numbers are formed as follows: 21 (with

a masculine noun) DnBTfl " ^ o r ^DS! ^ 1 ^
feminine noun) DWrV) D W or tffiB*! DWS>fi.
92
(with
64c.
1,000 |
100
PI. D*|>7X thozisands
PI. ri\xp
2,000
200
(Dual of S|?K);'
Const. s9s-
(Dual of HK&)
300
3,000
400
4,000
500
niK Eton
5,000
D^SSN n ^ n
600
(And so on, using

the mas. const,
700
with D*a^).
800
900
nixa nabtf
niD y&n
10,000
nirn, Kin, nian
20,000
D*ra-i
NUMERALS.
65.
67
Rules of the use of Cardinal Numbers.
1. They agree in gender with the noun to which they

are joined. Examples: one man HJIX fcJ^tf; twelve daughters
n w Mptf ntoa.
2. The Absolute form of the Numeral may be placed either
before or after the noun. Examples :two women D ^ J
^$0
or D W D*Bfo, ten boys Dnstt H W or rTlBW D ^ M .
The
Construct form of the Numeral always precedes the noun.
Example:
three days.
3. Hence there are three ways of expressing a number.
Seven days may be rendered, (1) D*5* !IS7!l^? (2) D ^ T ftSD^
(3) nsn# DW.

4. The Numeral ^TllX owe, is treated like an Adjective. It,
therefore, follows the noun, except in the Construct form,
one man 1HX fflii. As Predicate, IHJSt, like any other Adjective, may precede the noun (see 32, p. 30). Our God is
one
nriN is sometimes used in
the sense of a certain, *1HK ^X a certain man. There is a
plural D^fiN, meaning a few.
wrbx ma or ma wrbx.
5. Certain nouns, that are frequently used with Numerals, remain in the singular after numbers above 10. Such
nouns are: fcJ^X man, HQX cubit, DV day, H 3 ^ year, fcJHH
month,
shekel. Examples: 2J^K D^J5?H fifty men, HNJb
T\*$} d hundred years. But this rule does not apply if the
noun is placed first; 70 shekels D*SD6? DYpfcP
F 2
68
STUDENT'S HEBEEW GRAMMAR.
6. In combining numbers, the highest number may be either

first or last; with ) joining the numbers. Example:162
d?3î D W ] n$? or nw
D W ] B?3#-
7. The Definite Article is usually omitted with numerals.

Example:The eleven stars D^^fD *]>$? Itlit.
But, sometimes, the D is added to the noun. Example:
The Ten Words (Commandments) D n ^ H n i 2 W .
For ^ 6 with 1P1K, the Definite Article is always used.
Example:77*6 one king 'IPIXPI T?SP1.
8. To express the age of a person, add the word "|3 (for a
male) or H3 ( r o r a female). Examples:And Isaac teas sixty
years old pp&y D^fe?"|5 P C ^ I > Sarah teas ninety years old fiS
9. Observe the construction with the word years; as, 127

years D ^ JftBh H ^ DnfcW Pfl# HX&; 403 y*ar ^ W
10.
About is expressed by 3 .
Examples :About 400 m^w
ifaoA with numerals: too 00c/* EW# D ^ # ; fourfold DW2P11K

(Dual of PlMTlK); sevenfold DTBftBJ (Dual of PlMBfy .yow too
D 3 ^ , Me too of us WiBf; you three D D f l B ^ ^ /
11. In answer to the question ZZbw mwy ymrs &7/ wow?
prefix PIT (used adverbially in the sense of DVPl HT ^7/tfAwr%)
to the numeral; PTJB> DH^5? ^1 ^ S 6 toewtfy ?/mrs.
69
NUMERALS.
66.
B.
Ordinal Numbers.
MASCULINE.
1st
2nd
paten
FEMININE.
nii^xn
JTJtf
3rd
4th
i&'htf
^ri
5th
6th
*#'&5
$#
nw
7th
8th
9th
Wp^
V1?&
Wn
rvy*3#
rw#?
rwtffi
10th
7W
nnw
rvsrW
jva^n
rvBôri
All other Ordinals are expressed by the Cardinal Numbers. 'Examples:17 th day DV "tEW ny!l>; in the 50th year
67.
JRW& 0/ A i^sg O/ Ordinal Numbers.
1. Ordinals to the number 10 are used like Adjectives.

Examples:the first month jifc^nn BHhPl, ^ Me>^ ^wr
2. In counting years and the days of

dinals are frequently used instead of the
on the first day of the month GJHh? i n ^ 3 ,
month
n ^ f i n 3 , in the second year
the month, the CarOrdinals. Examples :

on the fifth day of the
U^P^f fOB^l.
70
68.
Fractions.
1.
Half i W l , Const. ^ H (VXI1 half of it), IVXn& (a
feminine form); f)
i rViTiTl (and so on, using the
feminine form of the Ordinals).

Other forms of fractions are: \ yyi,
}Dh; I WISH; ô
n n ^ S f , j n ^ J ? (plural DtflBV tenth-parts).

The fractions always precede the Noun. Example : rVSTi")
pnil a fourth part of a hin.
2.
$002 o/J jjp or
{portion).
Example : Jib Hip*! (or
aw^ A0fo0&som of the men; anything T\tiWfo or

1
"D ^; #// ^ 3 , all of us )j?2; all of you D5?3' ^ o / them D?3.

EXEKCISE 18.
A.
Translate:
]^p 3. roa? nrna?3p: Dâ? sna? 15 2. ^ $ n a i ^ >n^ i.

anh nbv 'nato? 5. DV ^yrns. Y$n *r\y_ 4. nb?iT ann
H-p? n^s 7. ny5tp ny;ia? a ^ n fpsia 6. annb i n ^
na?bp-i nb nin a;a? anib|b?b nninb? n>nb bsnip? ^3
Qânn aWn D?b n-jn arjinn s. Q^ppl niM atop? ^?bs
njHs nyw D'nfejn 373$ 9. &V ^7PV D?1? ^ n P^"l
nVi*! ma? niM8 23aft ma? D^toah Die?? nbahns >rn 10.
ntf b^na^. ^3i{; bb1? nN$b D ^ B rna?y 11. n t o n^s
i3p?1 nropb rfrb na^rr n n ^ s i 12. nnrnb nbtfl nbsb
ma? rnipy D^rip rntp3 13. ^n a?32b ]\nn nwzn
nbv-n^p ahn1? "W? nanbt?3 in# Di>3 14. b^na^ Tjbpb
oân^n ny?B^ ^nwn ansib ]i"iyy itito? 15. "ns afrh .in
NUMERALS.
71
D>&t7 ^ 5 naT5?n-n by*] 16. rin^ rbb mynbv ntibufa

\3?bp nnt ni37e 'tfjttfa innp Djna^ i s m nai: i^w HEN
c^ D^?;3 ^ 5 3 nbn rhv-vn cnt^rr bs nan 17. i^?
:TOO;D^btp ttfbttf ]a POSl naip c^btp-)3 ngtesi is.
B.
1. And God created (fcOl*!) upon the sixth day all the
cattle of the field and also the man. 2. I have two
thousand shekels with me in my house and two hundred
sheep in the field, which is distant from this place about
fifty-six cubits. 3. And Abraham lived one hundred and
seventy-five years and he died. 4. In the seventh year
of (^) king Ahab, there were four hundred and fifty
priests of Baal in the land of Israel. 5. And all the days
of Lamech were seven hundred and seventy-seven years.
6. And the flood was forty days upon the earth. 7. And
it came to pass in the six hundred and first year, in the
first month, on the first day of the month. 8. And Moses
gave to the children of Israel the ten commandments in
the third month on the sixth day of the month. 9. Upon
the fifteenth day of the month Nisan, there is a holy
festival to us all, 10. This altar is twenty cubits and
a half in height, and eighteen cubits in breadth.
11. And all the numberings of the children of Israel to
the house of their fathers from twenty years old and upwards were six hundred (thousand)* and three thousand
and fifty-five. 12, My son is 18 years old and my
daughter 14 years old to-day. 13. One day in Thy
courts is better than a thousand years in the house of
the greatest king. 14. How old art thou ? ( = How
many are the days of thy life ?) My age is ( = the days
* Words in round brackets are to be expressed in the Hebrew, though

omitted in the English <
72
of my life are) eighty-eight. 15. Bender into Hebrew:

25, 151, 938, 5656, 1899, 12 men, 16 horses, 181 years.
CHAPTER
69.
IX.
The Verb.
Every verb has a root or stem consisting of three letters, to

which prefixes and suffixes are added. This root is usually
found in the 3rd person masculine singular of the perfect of
the Kal conjugation.
There are seven modifications of the root, both in form
and meaning. They are called Conjugations, and are named
as follows:
I. Kal
Sp.
IV. Pual hyB.
I I Niphal
^fil
V. Eiphil ^yfiH.
III. Piel
V I Hophal ^ySH.
v i i mthpaei ^ysnn.
70.
I.
Meanings of the Conjugations.

Kal is the simple form of the verb in the active voice.
Example:7J3J5 he slew.*
II
Niphal is the passive of the Kal.
Example:/DM
he was slain. I t is also employed in a reflexive sense : 7&J53 he

sletv himself; IfiiSJO he guarded himself.
I I I Piel is the intensive or frequentative form of the
Kal in the active voice. Forms in the Piel mean to do something thoroughly, or often, or, by declaration. Examples:
* Although the verb ?&p is employed as the model verb, it occurs in the
Bible only three times, but i3 very common in Chaldee,
73
THE VERB.
he slew violently, he murdered, or butchered; "tSB' he broke

in pieces, he shattered (from *)%$ t break); XQtO he declared
unclean.
IV.
Pual has the same meaning as the Piel, but in the
passive voice.
V.
Example :
he teas murdered.
Hiphil is the causative form of the Kal in the active
voice, to make or cause a person to do something. Example:

Ttppn he caused (someone) to slay*
VI.
Hophal has the same meaning as the Hiphil, but in
the passive voice.
Example :
he was caused to slay, or
he caused to be slain.
VII.
Hithpael is the reflexive form of the verb in the
active; it means to do some act for oneself, or by oneself, or

to oneself.
Examples:
he slew himself;
he
taught himself; or, to pretend, or say, of oneself: "DJriPl he

pretended to be strange; DSHJIH he declared himself to be wUe.
The variations of the meaning of the verb as distinct from
the Kal should be very carefully learnt.
The first six conjugations are thus arranged in pairs:
I. Kal
II. Niphal
) Active, and ( of the simple idea of the

\ Passive
(
root.
III. Piel
IV. Pual
| Active, and ( of the intensive or frequen( Passive

(
tative idea of the root.
V. Hiphil
VI. Hophal
) Active, and j of the causative idea of the

\ Passive
(
root.
* Compare, in English, to rise and to raise ; to fall and to fell.
74
71. Distinguishing Signs of each Conjugation (compare the

examples already given) :
I. Kal employs the three radicals for its forms, without
any addition.
II.
Niphal has a 3 prefixed.
In the Future, Imperative,
and second Infinitive, this 3 is omitted, and, to compensate

for its omission, a strong Dogesh is placed in the first radical
{see 10, B, p. 8).
Thus, the Future form St?j9*
represents
The Dogesh in the p indicates that a 3 has been
dropped.
The fuller form with the 3 is never used.
In the
Imperative and second Infinitive a Pi is prefixed.

III., IV.
Piel and Pual forms have a strong Dogesh in the
middle radical.
The Pual has a y-lap under the first radical.
V. Hiphil has a Pi prefixed to the root, which letter is

dropped in the Future and Participle.
Thus, the Future
7*Dp^ is a contraction of TtDprV, and the Participle /^tOp? of

/*?pPl&.
Most of the forms have also a h\iz pyn in the
second syllable.
VI.
Examples
Hophal, like the Hiphil, has the prefix Pi, which is
dropped in the Future and Participle. Thus, /fap\ and /iDpft

are contracted from vtDDIT and 73pnfi.
The vowel of the
first syllable is ;bj? yvpr or a p-iaj?. Examples:/0p1> T ? ^ ? VII.
Hithpael has the prefix T\T\ added to the root, the Pi
being omitted in the Future and Participle.
The Future
/t?pJV and the participle 7t?priJD are contracted from 7t?pn?T
THE VERB.
and
75
Like the Piel and Pual, there is also a strong
Dogesh in the middle radical.

N.B.The
noted:
position of the Dogesh should be carefully
(1) In the first radical in the Niphal forms, where the 3 is

omitted; i.e., in Future, Imperative, and Infinitive.
(2) In the middle radical in the Piel, Pual, and Hithpael.
72.
Moods.
The following Moods exist:

(1) Indicative.
(2) Imperative.
(3) Infinitive.
A special form for the Subjunctive does not exist (see

however, end of next ).
73.
Each Conjugation has

A.
Two Tenses*
B.
Imperative (except the Pual and Hophal).
C.
Infinitive, Absolute and Construct.
D.
Participle (the Kal alone has two Participles).
* Most of the modern grammarians do not admit that there are real Tenses,
i.e., denoting the point of time at which an action is done ; but rather, that
the so-called Tenses define whether the action is completed or uncompleted.
Hence, the names Perfect (denoting that the action is quite finished ; see
the various translations given in 73A), and Imperfect (denoting that it is
not yet finished, including also the Potential mood, as may, might, etc.).
The Perfect and Imperfect are therefore called by these scholars Moods
{i.e., pointing out the condition in which an action stands) and not Tenses.
As, however, the name Mood refers to the Imperative and Infinitive, the word
Tense is here retained, and the name Future is preferred to that of Imperfect,
to avoid confusion with the meaning of Imperfect in other languages.
76
A.
Tenses. There are only two Tenses

(1) Perfect (also called Past and Preterite).
(2) Future (also called Imperfect).
For the Present Tense, see 93, page 103.

(1) The Perfect Tense describes an action that is completed at that moment. It serves for different Tenses
in English.
Thus: ^!Dj5 may be translated he sleic,
he has slain, he had slam, he was slaying, he had been

slaying.
(2) The Future Tense expresses the idea that the action is
incomplete, and has yet to continue.
Like the Per-
fect, it answers to several forms in English.
Thus :
may be translated he tvill slay, he will be slaying,

he will have slain, he will have been slaying, he should
slay, he might slay, let him slay.
The Future forms are also used for the Subjunctive mood.
Example
in order that he may slay.
N.B.For the use of the Participle in a future sense,

see 92, C, 5, page 101.
For further remarks on the Future, see 91, page 96.
74.
B.
Imperative Mood is always in the 2nd person, and is
derived direct from the Future (see ' 82, p. 80).
There is no
form for the Imperative in the Pual and Hophal.

peratives of the 3rd person, see 91, p. 97.
For Im-
THE VEHB.
75.
C.
77
Infinitive Mood. There are two forms or states of
the Infinitive, the Absolute and the Construct state.
The
Absolute state takes neither prefixes or suflSxes. The Construct

state, like a Noun, may have prefixed to it one of the four
Particles Jb'S'^'a (D'S'3'3)-
With one of these prefixes,
the Infinitive becomes a Verbal Noun.

in slaying.
Example: ^ b M
The Construct state of the Infinitive also takes the
Pronominal suffixes, like a Noun.
For further remarks on
the Infinitive, see 92, B, p. 100.

D.
The Participle is inflected and translated exactly like
a Noun.
76.
Examples:/tD)p a man slaying, or a slayer, D v ^ i p
men slaying or slayers, ^ D i p the slayers of, or those who slay.

The Kal alone has an active and a passive Participle. All
the other six Conjugations have one Participle each. All the
Participles, except those of the Kal and Niphal, commence
with a ft.
For further remarks on the Participle, see 92, C, p. 101.
77. Regular and Irregular Verbs. There are two main divisions of Verbs:
(1) The Regular, or strong,
(2) The Irregular, or weak.
(1) A Regular, or strong, verb is one that retains its three
radicals in every form of the seven conjugations.
(2) An Irregular, or weak, verb is one whose root contains
one or more of the letters y*'Vfl'N, and which, in the course
78
of inflection, drops one, or even two, of its radicals. Examples of

irregular verbs :DD*1> from the root U)p to arise; Jft\ from
the root jPO to give; Tp, from the root Pibj to smite.
N.B.All rules of verbs, all addition of prefixes and suffixes,
apply to the regular and irregular verbs alike.
7 8 . Verb-forms are made up of radicals and serviles (prefixes and suffixes denoting conjugation, gender, number, and
person). The following outline of pronominal prefixes and
suffixes applies to all verbs and to all conjugations alike.
The mark represents a radical.
TABLES OF PRONOMINAL PREFIXES AND SUFFIXES USED
WITH VERBS.
Added in the Perfect (all these are suffixes).

SINGULAR.
PLURAL.
3rd pers. mas. he has (sX.) 3rd pers. com. they have
3rd pers. fern, she has
Y00
Pi 000
2nd pers. mas. thou hast ft 2nd pers. mas. you have Dft
2nd pers. fem. thou hast ft000 2nd pers. fem. yoa have jft
1st pers. com. I have
'ft000 1st pers. com. we have
J]J000
79.
Prefixes and suffixes to the Future.

SINGULAR.
3rd pers. mas. he will
PLURAL.
% 3rd pers. mas. they will
)*
3rd pers. fem. she will
ft
3rd pers. fem. they will PI J ft
2nd pers. mas. thou wilt
000
2nd pers. mas. you ivill
ft
00
2nd pers. fem. thou uilt *> ft

1st pers. com. / shall
) ft
2nd pers. fem. you ivill Pl3 ft
X 1st pers. com. we shall
79
THE VERB.
8 0 . Suffixes to the Imperative (the same as the suffixes of

the 2nd pers. of the Future).
2nd pers. mas. sing
I 2nd pers. mas. plur.
2nd pers. fern. sing.
* | 2nd pers. fern. plur.
81.
!| 000
T\J
Suffixes to the Participle (like nouns and adjectives).
Mas. sing.
Fern. sing.
00
i Mas. plur.
H" 00 or T\l '
Ma
s . fern.
The Niphal participle has J prefixed. The Piel,

Hiphil, Hophal, and Hithpael have 12 prefixed.
82.
D*"00
JYl000
Pual,
Hints upon learning the Verb.
1. Learn thoroughly the prefixes and suffixes as in the

previous paragraphs.
2. Learn the form of the 3rd pers. mas. sing, of each of the
Perfect and Future tenses, and attach the prefixes and suffixes
required to each of these primary forms.
3. Learn all the Perfect forms together, the Future forms
together, the Imperatives together, and likewise the Infinitives
and Participles. This will enable the student to be constantly
comparing the form of one conjugation with that of another.
4. In accordance with hint 3, commit to memory the following primary forms in their exact order:
Perfect.hbp, hbp), tap, tap, bvpn, taj?n, tapnn.

Notice that the names of the conjugations, with the exception of the Kal, are identical with these forms. Thus:
80
II. SySJ, hence Stop}; III. SttS, hence Stop; IV. SyS, hence
Step;
V. ^BSH, hence S%C5j?n; VI. S&SPl, hence SlDj?n;
VII. Syfinn, hence StopHPl.
The verb StfS fo warfe?, to work,
forms the root of these names.

Primary Forms of the Future:
Stop*, Stop*, Stop*, Stop*,
^pj?!, Sep:, S&pn\

Imperatives.- -From the 2n<f person forms of the Future,
whence the Imperatives are derived, remove the fi. Thus,
are
from Sfopft, Ytopft, ^Stppfl, n^Stoptt,
derived the forms
/fop,
*/top (by change of vowel explained in 15, 3, p. 13),
^tOp,
r\j7fop.
Pi for the fl.
In Niphal, Hiphal, and Hithpael substitute a

In the Hiphil, the form
is used to form
the Imperative {see, for reason of this, 91, p. 97).

Primary Forms of the Imperative: 7 top 7topPl, /top, 7topiHf
Stopm
Infinitives are almost the same as the Imperative forms.
Primary Forms of the Participles:
Sts)p, Step??, S*?p, Stopft, Steprip.
7 top and ^ t o p , Stop},

The Participles from
the Piel onwards are formed by taking the primary forms of

the Future, and substituting a ft for the \
Thus, S t o ^ be-
comes /top/tp. In Pual and Hophal, yopr takes the place of nns.
Thus
becomes
becomes
The Regular Verb.
Model Verb ?l3j5 to slay.
Perfect (Past).
83.
KAL
{Active).
NIPHAL
(Passive).
PIEL
PUAL
(Active).
(Passive).
SING.
/tOpJ ê w#s slain.
3rd mas.
3rd fern.
PfbtDp she slew.

T
2nd mas.
2nd fern.
1st com.
: FIT
/tOp 7ê murdered.
nb&p
: ':
thou (m.) hast

ÂtfM (m.) w#s
slain.
slain.]
J-lbtop thou (f.) hast
A<w (f.) wast
slain.
slain.
^.Fr??Pp I have slain.
^Pl/ftp? 7 M)fl* slain.
/0p he ivas murdered.
,?7ie murdered.
nbtSp *7w? tvw murdered.
thou (m.) As wiwrdered.
nb&p
nb&p
dered
murdered.
fow (m.) w;#s mwrdered.

thou (f.) wast murdered
I was murdered.
PLUK.
3rd com.
^btpfj they have slain.
2nd mas.
you (m.) have

slain.
]lbtpp yow (f.) have
slain,
w?e 7#ve #ara.
2nd fern.
1st com.
7ê?/ were *#*'#.
7te?/ murdered.
yow (m.) we/'e
yoto (m.) murdered.

]J3Y?fc3p yow (f.) murdered.
slain.
tue zoere
*Dy@p we murdered.
7ê?/ were murdered.

?/0W/ (m.) were mrdered
]JT?t3|"? yow (f.) were mwdered.
we were murdered.
Perfect (Past).
HIPHIL
(Active.)
HOPHAL
(Passive.)
HITHPAEL.
SING.
3rd mas.
7^tDpH 7ie caused to slay.
3rd fern.
she caused to slay.
2nd mas.
thou (m.) hast caused to

slay
thou (f.) hast caused to
slay
i caused to slay.
2nd fern.
1st com.
^b&pn
/QpT\
he was caused to slay.*
7$pflPl he slew himself.
nbtppn
she was caused to slay.
nbt^pri/l she slew herself.
thou (m.) wast caused to

slay.
thou (f.) icast caused to
slay.
was caused to slay.
inn thou (m.) hast slain

thyself]
thou (f.) hast slain
thyselfl
I have slain myself.
PLUE.
3rd com.
2nd mas.
2nd fern.
1st com.
ib^tppn they caused to slay.

you (m ) caused to slay.
).Fi?^PU Vou (f) caused to slay,
we caused to slay.
they were Caused to slay.

yon (m.) were caused to
slay.
].nbtopn yu (*-)were cause^ t

slay,
we were caused to slay.
* Or, he caused to be slam.
they have slain themselves}
nb&pnn
you (m.) have slain

yourselves
you (t.) have slain
yourselves)
we have slain ourselves.
TABLE OF REGULAR VERB.

^s
^s
53
&
rS
^
1*
<1
t3
<to
<53
*2>
H5
03
53
%
. ^^ 53NS
^ê 5^ ^?$
g
*.
^s
g^
53
^j ^g
<to 53
5- *
53 53 53
r3 ^
^S
^ *.
*.S
S
I_4
Lperfe
1
ro
53
5- H
i>o
8
^
*v
5
c;
r-
fi:
ci
8
V^/
58
C
0
4
'
<S
<5
ro
88
53
.^s
53
3w
^r <
ao
S
x
^
?-'
S
/ s
^
H
\_/
^
.1
?3
S3
ivss
rî
SZ
r<
IS
lv-
li
li
"^Jil^
i* H^
^^ ^^ ^
s
s =
'I
PH
II
s>
Q>
^
JKi- *V
O.
^
rC^
1
i4
^S
* - oo
O
V
5*S
*
^
^
^
Oo
K,
n;. is x>
l>r l i i - g-K:
& & g
^ ^
^
^
ti
?S
^3
<^
oo
^
c;-
^
c
f^
m-
a .
-T^ ^ J^ ^
s~,
^
^
^
S
I
s
"O
-to
?*S
5>S
fC
c;
&..
fi.
^
li'
s
x::
^
a. a
s- S
n
n
i ^' , *' , ^
^"
| ^ s ^ 1 ^ ^ .
"S
5>s
>i
s &^
H rS1
V'
tô
s
SSi
f.; c;
fe, n
jr ^
_H
s a g
a Ts^ 4J
^
CO
CO
(M
cc
rt
s
/-N
/N
^^
vE 6 v_/
a
^
^-O
"S
^^
<
rl
eS|
c; c; p;
CL ri: In:
a
a
fj*
E
^ ^ ^ 53 . -I
l, ^ ir, l 8 ^ ^6 ^ 8 ^ * aS S
'
O v
5 ' ?
! l I S
-s
5
o ' ^
^
H
^d*
5^
53
S^
53
^
5S
^
5S
-*o
î
?5*
?S
f>h
*A*
rf
a.
'ri,.
*W
*^'
fl-
Jit
fc
'rr
lit
^
"^
ac
r>h
W.
1r\>.
S5Jir^5^^5^K^^
3 NO
^ ^ 0
S N O
a
? 5 N ^ C3ôt^>
ac JS or, uj,
C?
î
^
^2
S
so
1
5^
5^
53
^ & & & ir
S
<D
c; p.
HL- o ?
n
CJ
^S I
53
53 !
?>
, ?- !
5 J / 5 3 .
53^S
2 ^ :
a"
xz
< ds <
r^ ^ rs ^s ^*
&0
r<
0
^3
^
^
So
00
53
?.
3
3
53
1
^
M^
2
4^>
2
PH
53
r^,
S
+3
^3
53
53
53 S
^^ 5 3 . ^ 5 3 5 3 5
_ ^ 3
^ ^
^ ^
^S
/->
L ^
^3
83
<M
so
i-H
s: 3 a 1 1 a
g
a ^
a c2
|
" ^CO ^CC 1 CN 1 <N ^ r H
G 2
n
o03
^
*
84
*& .&o
rscZ/
<^
^
^
<s>
?*s <
r<
SO
M ^ . S^S ^rS
P4
SI
<ti
va
-/
/-N
S
c
ns
5*
S~\
MS
SO
5S5
5n
oo
<
W
self.
<$
=0
>
n;c- c;
<v- c.
n;
1^1
Hi
r:
&: & tf
^ ^ ^
sti
N
Xlv
Oi
|:
J*
jr.
n.
i3
ft
ft;
n
$* o 5s
^
00
<*)
I-
43
o
u
Pi
s
W
o
W
ivf>
o
jr..
r- i >
&
jn
Of a
jr-
3-
&
^
A-
ftiz
^r--^
ft
?S5
a-
*)
ft
3 *
W
+H
~r- ^
.
l-
^
ft:
r
J>
a a
H$
W
5S
ew
f <
=0
ofi
pr\ s *~a
5i
t>^
K.. &
v=-~ n^- m- nr
^
x
C'
C.
^J:
i:r
^J
d-
ft: ^
rr
85.
SJNG.
2nd mas.
2nd fern.
Imperative.
KAL.
NIPHAL.
/ D p slay thou
>'
' (m.)
*btDp slay thou
(f.)
"' T "
PIEL.
he thou (m.)
sîtt.
/ D p murder thou
murder thou
(f.)
> b t ^ n ^ *A<W (f.)
HITHPAEL.
HIPHIL.
/ D p / 1 mtt*0 7WM (m.)
" ':
to slay.
cause thou (1)
to slay.
7 D p n n slay (m.) thy-\

1
' '
*^/.
^btepnn slay (f.) 7^' : : '
self.\
PLUK.
2nd mas.
^lb&p slay ye
TPipprT fo ye (m.)
slain.
(m.)
2nd fern. nabbn slay ye
n j b t S p n fo.y* ( 1 )
T:
:
slain.
CD
T:
Construct
Infinitive.
NIPHAL.
PIEL.
PUAL.
HIPHIL.
HOPHAL.
To slay.
To be slain.
To murder.
2b Je
murdered.
To cause to
slay.
To he caused to
slay, or to cause
to he slain.
bitsp
bbp
bbp?
btap
bbp
bbp
b$pn
b^pn
b&pn
HITHPAEL.
KAL.
If
Absolute
(1)1
Sb^pOn slay (m.)

cause ye (m.)
to slay.
yourselves}
cause ye (f.) mb&pnn ^ (f).
yourselves
If
86.
""
murder ye
(m.)
murder ye i
00
87.
Participles.
KAL
KAL
(ACTIVE P A R T . ) .
(PASSIVE P A R T . ) .
Mas. sing.
7tpp slaying.
Fem. sing.
nbtap or nbftp
h'îtOp being slain.

slaying.
nb-itop
?5
PIEL.
NIPHAL.
/ D p i having been slain.
nbtpp? or nbeps
?)
having
h&ab
n7C3i~a or
T
Mas. plu.
D^ftp
slaying.
murdering.
mur-
: >- :
v v '- :
-,
dering,
having been slain.

murdering.
HIPHIL.
PUAL.
Mas. sing.
baps
Fem. sing.
Mas. plu.
rribap?
rribôp
Fem. plu.
nbtapft
', murdered,
nibtapE
.,
HOPHAL.
A t P p f i causing to
nb>tpps
n*b>tpp
55
?)
rriVtppD
Fem. plu.
J
( having been caused\
/ t O p t t ^ to slay (or, having
'' T ( caused to be slain).
rnbftpE
HITHPAEL.
/tJpJl/Q slaying oneself.
nb^pnp
nbtopp
t^btpptt
,,
nibtopp
D>"b^p09
slaying our-, you?'-,
or themselves.
nibtapnp
THE VERB.
88.
87
N o t e s on t h e V e r b f o r m s .
1.
Pausal forms {see 15, 4, p. 13).
Perfect K a l : nS&j?,
ft^p,
Niphal: rhbp,
pfccij?, *nSbj5, ^Jpj5, S B O .
W?K>j?J, etc.
Piel: nStSlj?, iStep, etc.

P u a l : nSbD, etc.
J t e r * Kal: *Sbj#t, 6 b j 2 , ^bj?Pl.
Niphal:
r
^ S&iaFl,
. .. |T .
te)\
.. | |T . TflD&n.
.. |, T .
P i e l : ^ j a l j l , ^ t 3 j 5 ; , !|7tej31|, etc.
2.
To conjugate any other verb, substitute the root-letters
of the verb to be conjugated for the letters StDp.
Thus:
Perfect of *\2\ to remember, is IJT, fnDT, JjH3f> filDT, WlST,
npT, Drrpi, |wpl> 15T.

3.
Observe in verbs, one of whose letters is lYfi'D'TJ'21, to
apply the rule in 10, A, 2, p. 8, and write ^3TJ (not ^5W)J

tiSW\ (not ttfigty, TAD! (not Wll?*).
4.
Many verbs are used in the Piel and Hiphil conjugations,
and not in the Kal, their meaning, however, being the same as
though they were Kal forms.
Thus: ^^H he spoke (Piel), not,
he spoke frequently ;* / H ^ he divided (Hiphil), not, he caused

to divide.
* In the Vocabularies, this use of a verb is represented thus, ll" 7 ! III., h a
v.
88
5.
Many verbs prefer the vowel nnp in the Kal Future
instead of the D.Vm. Thus: htt&9

6.
JfibB^ for StflS^,
yh$\
The Di?in of the Kal Future and of the Active Participle
Kal may be written either defective ;fop\ or, full TlDjT; /tdb
or St?ip.
7.
The Hophal forms have sometimes y-iap instead of yPT
throughout all the tenses.
Examples:}J?ETl foy were cad
for ttb^n; na^n A* PAS caused to lie down, for
iS^H.
CHAPTER X.
THE
89.
VERB(continued).
How to parse a Verb.
1. Verb, Regular or Irregular.

same.
3. Conjugation.
2. Hoot and translation of
4. Tense.
5. Person.
7. Gender (if in a sentence, name the subject).
6. Number.
8. Explain
any prefixes (as ) Conversive, see p. 92, etc.) and suffixes.

9. Explain any change of vowel from the ordinary form.
10. Translation of the complete word.
Example :^D v2?Pl : * Regular Verb; 2. Root Tj^p to reign;
3. Conjugation Hiphil;
4. Perfect Tense;
5. 3rd Person;
6. Plural Number; 7. Common Gender; 10. They have caused

to reign.
89
THE VERB.
EXERCISE 19.
1. Write out the whole of the Niphal of ^ ^ ,
the translation of each form.
with
2. Write out the primary forms of the Perfect of the

seven conjugations of
3. Conjugate the Future Kal, Piel and Hiphil of *1^p.
4. Give the Imperative forms of Dp*?.
5. Write out the Participles and Infinitives
Niphal, Hophal and Hithpael of HpS.
Kal,
6. Give the forms of the 1st Person Plural Perfect and

Future of the seven conjugations of ^fe^p.
7. Conjugate the whole of the Piel of
iy\.
8. Give all the forms of the Imperative Masculine

Plural of nftS, and all the Feminine Plural forms of the
Participles of the same.
8 9 a . Syntax of the Verb (see 21a, p. 21, and 35, p. 31).

1. The Verb agrees in gender and number with its subject.*
2. The Verb should stand first. Example:The men sleio
If the sentence is in the negative, put N7
or 7X or f^N first. Example:And the dove did not find #7)
r W H nVp- 4 - Before the Object (Accusative), put n X t
* Examples of a verb in the singular joined to two nouns or a noun in the
plural, occur: such as, f"lHN1 DHD ")2!fll and Miriam and Aaron spake;
rri'KP W let there be lights. (The verbs are in the singular).
f Many instances occur, especially in poetical passages, of the omission of
HK before Accusatives.
90
(see rules 35).
5. Verbs in the Causative sense, in the Piel*
or Hiphil, take two Accusatives. Example:"HX &0 ^STTin

^STJ shew me, I pray thee, thy way.
6. Nouns having a col-
lective sense often take the verb in the plural; such are:
#, Dy, irro, *ij35, |*. Example-.iinyr^ &x bK!

awrf owe /waw s^Vs to his neighbour.
The nouns D\|nfc$ lord,
D^PPX 6)W, DvS?3 m>Q&tM\ take the verb in the singular.
EXERCISE 20.
(On the Perfect of the Regular Verb, and Parsing.)
A.
Parse and translate :
Dciipj59 o. -ns 4, ^nsps 3. -^rp1?? 2. sn5pT i.

12,7-Tncin 9.
cri^pn 8.
f ^ ? 7 ^ 7-
QJ-nflpn 6.
wÔn io.
B.
>?i nia&ftnn r r m n sinptp? >? 4. 2-i.os -tnn Drba-nî 3.
aj-nsi 'n ms n$$ nt*;n?n n ^ - r i ^ i 5. rye -v^P?
bb ^JJTJQD V}?P3 6. B ^ W -nsaJ 'n rr*33 n$y n^njin
wnn Di*a >ni n??i?n ngn* n ^ 3 * 7. *p? ^ 9 $ ?
Jjftbgon "">$ 9. ornagp D^T^3^-n^ b^nar; ^3 .YTâJn 8.
s^nn cr'ajn nrnps 10. W E E ? n-jn stfnn ^n b$ >btf
* For Piel in a causative sense, S 94 end of 1.
f rn3 0 c%, n i ^ 0 rest, merge the radical H into the H of the pronominal suffix. Thus: rra^ ft-on, *n?^n, for nrn| 9 nrnan ^napri,
THE VERB.
91
C.
1. Our fathers have not kept the law of God which
was written by the hand of Moses. 2. My way is hidden
from the Lord. 3. I was forgotten like a dead man from
[the]* heart, 4. For I have been stolen (Pual) from my
land, and also here I have been kept as a slave. 5. Why
did you not sanctify me in the eyes of the people ? 6. We
have heard all that our fathers have related unto us.
7. Who sought this (fern.) from your hand ? 8. You have
destroyed the inheritance of the Lord.
9. You have
caused many to stumble in the law. 10. Why will you
loose this people from its works? 11. They have concealed themselves from their own flesh and have not
remembered the holy commands of their father. 12. I
have separated you from the midst of your brethren for
my servants.
89b.
The Adverbs TX then, D'lft before, are used frequently
with verbs in the Future, to represent the idea of the Perfect

tense.
Thus: D^ft y&\
TK then Moses sang; T\1&& Slip! TX
then Solomon caused to assemble; ^ 5 1? ^/5^ 0*!$? *?&$ before

I had left off speaking.
EXERCISE 21.
(On the Future of the Verb, and Parsing.)
A.
Parse and translate:
isapo1! 5. Wjprv) 4. rg-isttfn 3. ^V$n 2. ^0?111.

1
.^DMJ-I 10. DâJyi 9. to ?^ 8. W'pti 7. ririp'rv] 6.
* Words in square brackets are not to be rendered in the Hebrew.
92
sbi anb n$ 2. Dîarr Tjinp "gris nnstp-ritf y ^ y 1.

n>?tt?> 4. jiy -IM} nsT5 75b 3. wi??^rtbinnb D^?N -nsT.
E^K 6. ^?an - m ntws spsj^. sb1] -n?^ wb 5. nrap-i nnj
iba;? 'n *? xrpri ^ ^Stffl EN 7. o?Otf tab^S ^TT!?
n&,^ D ^ P ? 1 ? ! .insr t^b^b 8. b#?n riV) Tn"P ^ p
'n pQsno n^w bpn 10. Tyn-b|-ny nîoqs n^ntpnq 9.
7
nb yttfin? -IST ry 12. ^rtbg "nv iyn-1 sna? 1521 p-fliTO 11.
C.
1. The lips of the wicked will speak evil. 2. For the

lips of the priest shall keep knowledge, and law shall
they seek from his mouth. 3. Your eyes will be opened.
4. A man shall not be cut off from thee from off the
throne of Israel. 5. Thou shalt be buried in a good old
age. 6. I will open to you the windows of heaven. 7.
And I will write upon the tablets that which I wrote
upon the first tablets, which thou hast broken to pieces.
8. Ye shall not mention other gods. 9. I will not destroy
this city for the sake of the twenty righteous men who
are in it. 10. The snow will hide itself upon them. 11.
Before they lay down, the wicked men gathered themselves against them.
90.
) Vav Conversive (or Consecutive*).
One of the most frequent forms of the verb is that used

with the ) called Vav Conversive or Vav Consecutive.
This ) (meaning and) is placed :
A. Before a form in the Perfect, and converts the
meaning into that of the Future;
B. Before a form in the Future, and converts the
meaning into that of a Perfect.
* So called, because it is mostly used in a consecutive narrative.
THE VEUB.
A.
93
) Conversive with the Perfect.This is punctuated with a
K)f. Examples:7L?P he slew, 7bp1
anc
^ he w^ âV ( n t and
he slew).
Notes.(1) In front of the letters ft'fi'Vl the ) assumes
the form of 1 (see 31, 3, p. 29), &fi& he sought, fc^MI
and he will seek.
(2) If the Perfect form is required to be retained with a 1,
the subject to the verb must be placed first. Thus:
yfcW 7H1 and David heard, but T H JflbKh means, and
David will hear.
JB. ) Conversive with the Future.This is punctuated with
a ring and is followed by a strong Dogesh in the next letter.
Examples:vbp* he will slay, 7bp*1
anc
^ he slew.
Notes,(1) When X is the first letter, since the X does

not take a Dogesh (see 15,1, p. 13), the ) Conversive
is punctuated with a fDj?. Example :7bpX1 and
I
(2) If a * with a w\w follows the ) Conversive, the Dogesh
is omitted (see 10, B. 4, p. 8). Example :73T1 and
he spake.
(3) When the 1 has afcOS?in front of a Future form, it is
not ) Conversive, and the meaning is not changed.
Sbp*. he will slap, /fop) and he will slap.
(4) Observe that /Dpi, Perfect with 1 Conversive, and
7bp*1, Future with 1 non-Conversive. both mean
and he will slap.
STUDENTS HEBREW GRAMMAR.
(5) In front of X (in the Piel and Pual), the ) nonConversive takes the vowel nns (see 31, 2, p. 29).
St3(5M. (with1) non-Oonversive) becomes ^ J 3 K 1 ; with
) Conversive it becomes
(6) In front of * (in Piel and Pual), the ) non-Conversive takes a P"vn ( w 15, 3, p. 13).. and the K)f
under the * is dropped. Thus:
(7)
WithxSor^N not, the ) is attached to the Particle.

Example :And he did not speak *)jT\
it/).
(8) With ) Conversive, the shorter Hiphil form is invariably used.
Thus:
(9) In parsing a form with ) prefixed, state the effect

Thus: (a) /bp*1), verb
of the ) upon the meaning.
regular; root ^bD to slay, Kal Future 3rd person,

singular, masculine, with ) Conversive changing the
meaning to the Perfect, and he slew.
. . . . with ) non-conversive.
(b)
(r) /faO) . . . .
/fop)
Perfect
. . . . with ) Conversive, changing the meaning into

the Future.
EXERCISE 22.
Translate and parse :
IQD^_ 5. nj'rb 1 ?^ 4- rntfp:n: 3. b^SWl 2. J nEpn 1.

wfprrn 10. ^nbcn: 9. TfbtjJMj 8. n ^ w i 7. ^sefein 6.
.TJ!??^! 15. V73N514. ijrrnp-i 13. ^95112. oj-iafew 11.
THE VERB.
95
B.
1. And we shall learn. 0 * 2. And she will not learn.
3. And the kings destroyed the great city. 4. And they
rose up early. 5. And I will remember. 0
6. And I
will seek. 0
C.
nin? nbtjfa 2. Q^jn n.57 -1903 so??5 ~mn trprro 1.

-i#8 D^n^n-ns ninbn-bs sftptfl 3. vw nîp nato-by
Drrns-ritf inn^-ns n^nbtf -ib?i 4. i ^ t p -itjfcj ninbn-by
n-jQn riEnip în-b^ ins ?rbtpm: 5. sps;-n^| pn!rrntf
npisin sifcvptp;y7. Tf^nn ^3.1 -li^n ^3 trnbs b ^ i 6.
-wan bip-nw nrnbtf EeJ*i 8. cibtp n y j vbM n3Tl
ft^n *ps<7 T^ n s ^ b rrih^n npn^n ^3 nnb?3rn 9.
nnQ^n bsn^ ^3 -^3pon >? D\ntpb?) ê?J?i 10. ^n&b
win c*biMn b^ njssn.î 12. ift^ rnpft inis ij-nprn 11.
23$? on?P VlS"b?-b? D^TP? nfe^s Tp?i 13. n\cr->?^
vtpnpb byn^-ny rripi nîaa ?ttfirn D3tp'*5 u . synrr vjtp
on^nia^ Drpp.3 D^T >p; DI ^?p-^_ 15. nn-in^ tontp Tpb^
.JPJ3 "Ssb -inST "UPS
D.
1. And they sold Joseph to the Ishmaelites for twenty
[pieces of]t silver. 2. And the chief of the butlers told
his dream to Joseph. 3. And there with us [was]t a
Hebrew^ lad, a servant to the chief of the executioners, and
we told (it) to him, and he interpreted to us our dreams,
* Phrases marked are to be rendered by the Perfect with ) conversive, and
the Future with 1 non-conversive.
t See note on p. 91.
96
each ( = a man) according to his dream he interpreted.

4. And all the elders of Israel gathered themselves
together, and they spake in the ears of the king. 5. And
he was buried with his fathers in the city of David.
6. And the children of Israel pursued after Midian, and
they destroyed all their army.
7. And thou shalt
separate the Levites from the midst of the children of
Israel. 8. And David sought the presence of the Lord.
9. And I remembered my covenant with your fathers.
10. And God spake all these words. 11. And his son
reigned in his stead sixteen years. 12. And Jacob sent
messengers before him unto Esau his brother to the land
of Seir. 13. And thou wert cast upon the face of the
field, and thou wert bound with bands of iron. 14. And
all that plenty will be forgotten from before that great
famine.
91.
The Jussive and Cohortative Forms of

the Future.
To make up for the lack of tenses and moods, so noticeable

in Hebrew, the Future has two sub-moods, called
A. The Jussive.
B. The Cohortative or Voluntative.
A.
The Jussive:
Affirmative.When
a form of the 2nd or 3rd persons ex-
presses a command or wish, it is said to be in the Jussive mood.

Example;/fop* usually means he will slay, but it may also
be rendered let him slay, may he slay, or he shall slay, or he must
THE VERB.
97
slay. In each of these meanings

is said to be the Jussive
mood of the Future. The Jussive is thus also the 3rd person
form of the Imperative.
In the Regular Verb, no change is made in the Jussive
forms to distinguish them from the ordinary forms, except in
the Hiphil.
The forms of the Hiphil that are in the Jussive
mood prefer the vowel n to the vowel Y)7i iTVn. Examples :

7*P|T he will cause to slay, ^tpp*, Jussive, let him cause to slay.
As the Jussive is a kind of Imperative, this explains why
the Imperative Hiphil form is derived from 7?pP) and not
from h'topft (see 82, p. 80).
Negative.When the Jussive forms are to be used negatively, denoting a- prohibition, the particle "7X is employed
(see 61, p. 60)
Thus: J^fDlrSx do not be angry,
^?JTSK
let him not cast.

These constructions with "7N form the negative of the
Imperative.
Thus: Sbp slay thou
slay not! do
not slay !
Note.ih is also sometimes used with the Future to express
emphatic prohibitions, as in the Decalogue, DJJJ7) K7 thou
shalt not steal.
B.
Cohortative or Voluntative.This sub-mood expresses a
wish or desire to do something, and is indicated by T\ being

H
98
added to the 1st Person only of the Future. This PI is called

the Cohortative or Voluntative PI . Examples :
( from *)hp$ is formed PH/b^K I m*h to keep, let me
Kal
keep
-\hm
niaeo M ns keep.
yS&tii
Pl^S^N
letme keep diligently.
T
' J
IS^J
n n a ^ J let us keep diligently.
^JDpJ
N ^ & M ?et ns cause to slay.
Piel I
"'
'
: " -:
let me slay myself.

e
/tS^PIJ
Pl^tSpnJ fct us slay ourselves.
Pausal forms : H ^ X , r n f i ^ K , nS&pPW, etc.

Note.The Cohortative Pi is rarely attached to Passive
forms. A few examples exist, as Niphal : PUpMNl and let me
be avenged; PIPDWI and let us reason together.
EXERCISE 23.
Translate and parse each verb :
nb tangJ-ns sinnpn-b 2. n ^ s ^.3? ttf^ t^V-bs 1.

-ibatei "7>pn *pni$ *? ib?n-bK ^vw$ 3. bsnt^ ^ 2 ijinn
n\^$n : N-ntf n;ro#?i 5. ^pan-b^ TJ^ rhtpn-bn 4.
n n q 5 njst&j 7. *Trbq^: *\V nntpn-"?$ 'rr-btf bbsqan 6.
nnbtp nits aybs-Ds 9. rhrs "'bn'sn jstpErbsn. 8. D^
Tjpp nn^ty ^^niw^rb? rnspy 10. -wbtf âg?! TmN-bp
nneys? 12. ^ ^ i ? P ^ P -inon-bw VTW ^pbw 13 n .
ntppb^ 13. Q^pbp 155 Tjî-Tvp rn^ntfi T p n ^ n ^ n
'n n>5 ??b 15. 'n \?sib D5î ntps&s} 14. D^ba^ri
Tjb nits nt$?2N: wnfrtf
THE VERB.
B.
92.
A.
99
Translate:
1. Do ye not shed blood and do not stretch forth a
hand against him. 2. May the Lord judge between me
and thee! 3. I-wish-to-keep a bridle to my mouth.
4. Let him speak to us and we will hear. 5. Let him not
destroy his people in his fierce anger ( = in the fierceness
of his anger). 6. Hide not your faces from us, for we are
in great sorrow. 7. And do not make great thy mouth
in the day of sorrow. 8. My son, do not forget my
teaching. 9. And now let us make a covenant, I and
thou. 10. May the Lord cause bread to rain from the
heavens for us and for our little ones. 11. Do (sing.) not
withhold chastisement from the lad. 12. And the land
shall not be sold for ever, for the land is mine. 13. Let
me speak this time in the ears of my lord, as ( = and) Iwish-to-make mention of his kindness to me heretofore.
14. Do ye not trust in princes, in the son of man, to whom
there is no salvation. 15. May the Lord keep thee from
all evil, and may He send upon thy head many blessings
from heaven IG. Let me pour out my song before thee,
and let men sing praises to Th}T Holy Name.
Notes on the Imperative, Infinitive and

Participle.
Imperative.1.
The Jussive forms of the Future serve
as the 3rd person Imperative; and with 7 $ , as the negative

forms of the Imperative (see 91, A. p. 97).
2.
When the Kal Future has the vowel nna (as 7NBfrl for
the Imperative also has nnB. Thus :
H 2
100
3.
The 2nd Person Mas. Sing, sometimes take a Pi, (similar
to the Cohortative H of the Future). Thus: P!l?2?> (for y>);

n ^ W n (for ^ P l ) ; n W P l (for W P 1 ) ; pnDT (for *\b]).
B.
Infinitives.1. The Infinitive Absolute is joined to a finite
form of the Verb to express emphasis.
Thus: )*)ti$F\ ^bfc^
ye shall carefully keep; TppFl T??H wilt thou indeed reign ?

I t is also occasionally used as an Imperative, DV"DN "TD?
rQE^Pl remember the Sabbath day.
It sometimes expresses the
verbal idea, without reference to time or subject.
Thus:
|X fchBh ^j53 Jhn slaying oxen and killing sheep; iMK \\T\)\
D^Xfi p . ^
2.
/3 W
and
he set hhn
over
al1 the
Iand
f E0UPf-
The Infinitive Construct takes one of the letters DVD'i
as a prefix; with A D ' 3 , the vowel is SJ^, thus: ÎpftPlS.
In
the Kal, as the form of the Inh'nitive Construct begins with a

K}^, / b p , the b'yZ
(and not / b M ) .
have the vowel fbij p'vn, t h u s :
SbM
The 5 has always ;bij P"i;n followed by
Strong Dogesh ^bjpD.
Before the letter PI, t2 becomes D,
thus:
3.
The Infinitive Construct takes the pronominal suffixes,
like a Noun. Thus: Kal, 7bpfo-$fay, ,k?tDD my slaying, "f^bp,
TjStpp, i ^ j ? , nStop, !?lpj5, D^lpj?, D i j 5 ; Niphal, V&jTt,
101
THE VERB.
Examples of Infinitive Construct with translation: v^?f?3 ?y/

my slaying, or when I slay, or when I slew; *?[3?^1 l ^Hl hl'ny~
down, or when thou liest clown.
G. Participle*1. Participles agree in Gender and Number
with their subject, thus : Women learning
2 Participles are used as Nouns: Dfiifc^ one who is Judging
a judge; 1ty\& a keeper. The Participle therefore may be
declined like a Noun, ^2)W, ^t?Si^, etc. (see 50, Class III..
p. 45).
3.
The Personal Pronouns are used with Participles to
denote the Present Tense (see 93, p. 103): SjDp ^
(m.), or
PlSaijp *J{* (f.) / am slaying, I slay, St?p HPlX thou slayest,
rhtip m, hbb wn, rhsb
SAPI, nhtsb m,
nibbD wi3,
D^3j5 DflK, ni73j5 |nx, D*7&ft DPI, ni7fi?p {Pi.

4. The Definite Article with Participles is used with the
meaning of "IfcJ^tf. Example:Ip^n he who ccqrtureth. The
same sense is conveyed, especially in proverbs, with the T\
omitted, as jiX^ $ M * ITltD i n j ^ ^0 / ^ diligently seeketh good
seeketh favour.
5. The Particle T\^T\ behold! gives the Participle the sense
of a Future tense. Thus: Ttpftft *}3f! behold I will cause to
rain.
* In some Grammars, especially those based upon the ^"Qy |1K^ Ti*?n by
Judah Ben Zeb, (Breslau, 1796), the Piel and Hiphil have Active and Passive
Participles: Piel ^BDE a n d t a p D ; Hiphil ^ B p B and ^ttpE; whilst the Pual
Participle is 7t$p; the Hophal ?Dpn. The very rare cases in which these
Pual and Hophal forms, without the D, occur and the similarity of their
meaning with the Passive Participles of the Piel and Hiphil, have resulted in
the arrangement adopted in this book becoming almost universal in modern
Grammars.
102
EXERCISE 24
A.
-ibTfl "Ti^J 8. ^.5^n 7. n^>tpn 6. -VTM 5. *[tp?3-nfc$.
/tpgs rnsttf 11. tabtpw tsbtp 10. i ^ p t ^ 9.
B.
]trw btf n i s i niiyj V3i?rw irni. Tfban -lyi 2t#n$ 1.
obsn 3. fab*?? n&3$ nair rn.tpy arntp 73 2. nnân
7^n w$2y\ 4. oyn n^j b? by s^nn ci5 ^3? ^J-iptf ^tfPO
Tjoj^-bsn I?1? ^?? ' n J ? y n ^ ? 5. a^rrn-bs-ntf Tppnb
rn^tp'pn ^nib ^321 7. sps; \35TOiptpi.^PPTH 6. )^^n-bw
'n n$ npspn "ip*. ri$ nptpn-bs nbx s. *j3b b? on" -lWpn
ini? 10. âi^. ID^T Diwa DISH D^T TfDitt? 9. "isniasi T \ ^ :
nwby liv nzn 11. nb nprj aîT"? *H!^ nb sap? inDi
ti?9?n nnn5?1 n?3P win 'rrns 12. onsb nî^v D^pb?p
Dâ via?! Dap> nn'w ^ > n i 13. n^p nn,^p sinn
.liss \3? 7 ^ bsn^ >3.a 7^5 ain tag&n 'n ufety u .
C.
1. Behold I will cause all joy to cease from your midst.
2. Hearken unto me, ye who pursue ( = pursuers of)
righteousness, who seek ( = seekers of) the Lord. 3. He
who teaches my hand for the battle. 4. For it (fern.) you
are seeking from before me. 5. Why do you not * keep
my ways and observe the command of my mouth.
6. Folly is bound up (Part.) in the heart of a lad. 7. He
who keepeth his mouth and his tongue, keepethf his soul
* D3J*, see 61, B. 3, p. 61.
f Use the Future.
THE VERB.
103
from troubles. 8. For if he will surely cry unto me, (and)

I will hearken, for I am gracious. 9. When we remember
Zion, the city of our glory. 10. When they spoke unto
me, (and) 1 wrote all their words in the scroll. 11. He
shall surely pay, and, if he has nothing, then he shall be
sold for his theft. 12. Cast ye him into this pit which
is in the wilderness. 13. Pursue after your enemies and
destroy them. 14. Sell thou (fern.) the oil, and pay thy
creditors. 15. Sanctify yourselves and attend to the
word of my mouth when I speak unto you.
93.
The Present Tense.
There is no special form to denote the Present Tense.

may therefore use :
We
A. The Present Participle Active.

B. The* Infinitive Construct.
C. The Future.
A.
The Present Participle Active {see 92, C. 3).
B. Infinitive Construct, when used with a word like when,

or as {see 92, B. 2, 3); *y&#3 when I hear.
C. Future. When expressing the idea of continued action,
of habit. Thus : 2N PIBB^ M i l | 5 a mse son gladdens a father.
94.
Notes on the Conjugations.
1. - Intransitive Verbs: Kal and Piel.There is a class of

Intransitive Verbs that prefer the vowel nv in the 3rd person
Perfect, as 1%$ 1
oe
heavy;
Yt\
to be pleased.
In the
104
Participle Active, their forms are 152, TSH (instead of 122

YSh).
Future: 12^\t
fSHV
to be small. Participle Jbp.
A few verbs have Dîn, as JbD

Future JtOpV
The Intransitive Verbs, like
to be great, pTH to be strong,
JHD to be holy, are rendered in Piel and Hiphil alike.

yli
and D ^ i l mean he made great, he magnified; &lp
Thus:
and
B ^ p P l he made holy, he sanctified. This gives the Piel a

Causative sense.
2
Niphal.
There are two verbs, similar to the Latin
Deponent Verbs, that are Passive (Niphal) in form, but Active

in meaning. These are $2$) he swore, J?5^'*5 anc^ ?<e swore
[but, Hiphil Tiy3JVl I caused to swear ]; and DnSj he fought,
) and he fought.
3.
Sentences with an oath. Note the construction of the
Negative after the verb to swear, or an expression of an oath :

. . . . DX . . . . ^ i ? 3 ^ J / have sworn . . . . that I will not;
H O ^ * V T f l $ fi^Pfl Sit 'Tl2 *h r\V2Wn Swear to me by the
Lord that thou wilt not cut off my seed after me; *')% $\ DN 'P! *Fl
As the Lord liceth, if there is not a nation.
4.
Hithpael.
This conjugation has sometimes the meaning
of the simple Passive, like the Niphal.
Thus : DPtfnnS (Gen.
xxxvii. 35) to be comforted.

Transposition of letters, a. If the first radical is either fc?, ?,
or D (one of the Sibilants, see 4, p. 3), this letter changes place
with the J1 of the Hithpael, which then takes a Weak Dogesh
THE VERB.
105
(according to Rule in 10, A. 2). Examples:^)E>PI (not

l ? T ) n ) he kept himself; 1 3 ^ , 1 (not ISWlTl)
Ififipn (
n()t
he hired himself;
^ P n n ) he hid himself.
b. If the first radical is ), the same transposition takes

place, but the H of the Hithpael becomes 3. Example:
Hithpael of pn_; pT[&5U we shall justify ourselves (not p^VPJ
nor p^PlW).
r.
If the first radical is either H, t3, J, or H, the T\ of the
Hithpael is occasionally dropped, or assimilated, and the next

letter takes a Strong Dogesh.
speaking by himself;
Examples :"lS^fi f r ^ 5 * ^ 5
"ntjfi for ^nDJlp purifying
himself:
5|N33n for S|N3inn prophesy ye; DSFlft for D^finA Mow /**
wwfo? thyself perfect.
EXERCISE 25.
A.
n^yatpan 5. 'qsritpna 4. PTOSS 3. ba^n 2. n r i ^ n p p l.

.iBnb?i 10. ^ B E I 9. ODV^- 8. ^tftfPP 7. ^ P p 6.
B.
1. Write out the Participle Hithpael of IDE* with the
Personal Pronouns, and the translation of each form.
2. Conjugate the verb i n p throughout the Hithpael.
3. Write out the 3rd person Feminine Plural Future
with the ) conversive, of p l X in Niphal, Piel, and Hithpael.
4. Give the Participle Active forms, witli the pronouns
she and you (mas.) of the verb M?2p.
106
STUDENT'S HEBREW
95.
GRAMMAR.
Rarer Conjugations.
In addition to the seven conjugations, there are a few more

that are rarely used. Of these, the chief are:
1.
vVk Po-el (a form of the Piel), as ÎllD, which serves
as the Piel of the verb ISO.

2.
?1?3 Po-al (a form of the Pual), as i i i D , which serves
as the Passive of
3.
ttb.
hhvB Pilel, as pKB> to be at rest; pSH 1o be green.

Pilpel, as
2 to support; f| to chirp.
Pe-al-al, as irHfiD to run round quickly.

6.
7^%r\T) Hithpalpel, as npnOfin to tarry.
CHAPTER XI.
THE VERB(continued).
96.
The Verb with Suffixes of the Accusative

Pronoun.*
The Accusative form of the Personal Pronoun may be

added to the Verb, (1) by forms of HX (see 57, 1, p. 57), as
he will slay me; or (2) by combining with the Verb
a pronominal suffix, as
he will slay me.
The vowel
nv under the 7, in the second example, that joins the verb to

the suffix, is called the binding or connecting vowel.
* Called for shortness, Accusative
suffixes.
THE VERB.
97.
107
Table of Accusative Sufl&xes to Verbs.
Compare the Suffixes to Nouns, 38, p. 34.

PLURAL.
SINGULAR.
me.
)} or )y-
2nd pers. Feminine *TJ
thee.
3rd pers Masculine )?] (ori)
him.
Q or D
3rd pers. Feminine fl (or H)
her.
IT
1st pers. Common
^ or *J-
us.
2nd pers. Masculine TJ
98.
you.
or {TT
them.
Perfect Kal:
3rd Mas. S i n g : / t ^ p he slew, ^?tpp he slew me, ^ D p he

slew thee, \?fop he slew thee (f.), 1/tpp or ^Pl/Dp /^ sfew
H/lpp Ae s t o Aer, w t p p /^ s ^
ws, DD/tSp ^
e s ew
AMTC,
ou
t/ > E/tpp
A6 s/ew W#m.
3rd Fern. Sing.: H 7 P p she slew, ^ r n t p p she slew me,
*\t)bt?p> ^ P i ? ' ^ r f e j ? ' or vfc&j?, nriSaj?, unS&jp,

DH/Dp.
Observe the change of?] into Jl.
2nd Mas. Sing.:
Wow Affs s t e ,
P l ^ b p , ^n'pDjp, DTI76J3.
2nd Fem. Sing.:
1st Pers. Sing.:
or vrn'pBj?, rrn'pBj?. 05^?&j?> tffl'p&j?3rd Com. Plur.: T?$
v i t e ) , ntaap, etc.
they have slain, ^ S D D , flVDj?,
108
2nd Mas. and Fern. Plur.:
you have
slain, MflS&p, ^ r i S l D p , nvfr&p, etc.

1st Com. P l u r . : 1 J / D p we have slain, ^jSfcf?,
etc.
^?p,
9 9 . The Perfects of the other Conjugations take suffixes in

exactly the same manner as the Kal. The Passive Conjugations naturally have no suffixes, nor has the Hithpael. The
Piel alone varies from the Kal in its 3rd person sing, mas.,
form, which is as follows: 6i?p], ^ B p , ^tpp, f?3p,
fa$p, rbbp, uStep, crtep, thqp.

The other forms of the Fiel are (on the model of the Kal):
[rb^p], *xb$p, i\T)b&p, etc.

Thus, Hiphil:6*Bpn], O ^ b p H , ^ t p p n , etc ; pW?B|Tl],
100.
Future w i t h Accusative suffixes.

Kal
With the
3rd Mas. Sing. 7bp* he ailI slay.

he will slay me.
^/JpjT he wiM slay thee.
Demonstrative 1
^j?*
i?w
^T 7Lpp1 he will slay thee.

he trill slay him.
he will slay her.
he will slay us.
DD^tpp* he will slay you.
he will slay them.
^w
^W^w.
109
THE VERB.
vbpPl she will slay, 7bpF) thou (mas.) wilt slat/, v^pF) thou
(fern.), and 7bpX, are inflected in the same way.
bbp\
has the following forms :rwStpp*, ^ P | T . ^ S t S j y ,
rrbtow, wiStap, D3ta?p\ Q^t?p\

t>topft is like 5|Stpp^; PoSbpPl takes no suffixes.
In the Pie?, Stt|T becomes ^ ^ , ^ ^ 1 5 % ^W-.'
^W--'
"^Tf>/y, ^Vt?p!, ^ P | 7 _ , etc.
101.
A.
A.
Nun Demonstrative.
B.
iW/ Paragogic.
The iVwM Demonstrative (also called Aim Energetic or
iVim Epenthetic, i. e. added in the middle of a word) is a J

placed before the accusative pronominal suffixes of the Future
forms.
Example:^yiSlD'! he w^
being a fuller form of ^ 7 3 5 /
honour me (Psalm 1. 23),
Usually, this J- is assimilated
in the suffix, and a Strong Dogesh represents its omission.

Examples : ^ 3 /A\?\
becomes
ÊJp*;
^p/ipp* . becomes
Tptpp^; înj/top^ becomes ^/ftp^ (in this instance, the H drops,

but the 3 receives a Dogesh);
V&pp\
becomes
becomes wSlpjT.
The J Demonstrative is only used in pausal forms, and

before the suffixes me, thee (m.), him, her, and us.
110
B.
The JS'un Paragogic is occasionally placed at the end of
forms of the 2nd and 3rd person in the Future, ending in *l

or }, without affecting the meaning in any way.
becomes J^pSlPl;
W&E'n.
Thus *p2nJ?l
becomes
becomes
The forms mostly occur at the end of a sentence,
such as is marked by an NFirong or a p-i^p.

102.
I m p e r a t i v e w i t h Suffixes.
Kal:bbp, "jStOp slay me, vh$$
slay him, rhpfi
or PI^j?,
'hpfi, 'yh&p ây me, wStpj?, H ^ p , etc.
hpp, s?h$p, etc.

Piel:Stpj5, ^ p , inStejp, etc.
HiphihStejpn, ^êpn, vi^&jpn, etc.

103.
Infinitive Construct w i t h
Suffixes.
The Infinitive Construct is inflected like a noun (see also

92, B. 2, p 100).
It further takes the Accusative pronominal suffixes.
K a l : o S p p to slay me, "^Lpf?, ^ i p j ? , fapj5, nStpp,
ttS^p,
DD^tpp, D^tpp.
P i e l : ^ p , ^ p , etc.
Hiphil : ^ ^ t p p n , ^ & j ? P I , etc.
Observe the distinction in meaning between v5p7 t m1l
slaying ( = when I slay), and 'Optpp? to slay me.
THE VERB.
104.
P a r t i c i p l e s w i t h Suffixes.
Ill
(See 92, p. 101).
When the Participle is used as a Verb, the form of the

1st pers. sing, suffix is ^
Examples:*J?tpip slaying me,
When the Participle is used as a Noun, the ordinary Pronominal Suffixes are employed (see ib., C. 2).
EXERCISE 26.
A.
1. Write out the whole of the Future Hiphil of 2*0
with the Accusative suffixes, giving the translation of
each form.
2. Write out the Perfect Piel of D53 with the Accusative suffixes.
3. Give the Imperatives Kal and Hiphil of ^Dt with
the Accusative suffixes, translating each form.
B.
ppîn 5. ^bppi 4. -vriDtp 3. DJjneefa 2. ^n^tT. I.

ornij1! 10. "^ttrft 9. nn^yrji s. onbtp^ 7. TH?^1 6lanjpai 14. nangp*? 13. -vitfbtt} 12. vtoj^snn n .
.0?T}? 15.
C.
Translate (attaching the pronoun to the verb):

1. You (m.) have sent me. 2. Cause me to tread.
3. And bring us near to thy service. 4. Hide them in
the shadow of thy wings. 5. And thou wilt remember
me. 6. Teach me (Piel) thy statutes. 7. He will gather
them. 8. They have stoned me. 9. He will bring him
112
near. 10. To sanctify me in the eyes of the people.

11. Thy hand has supported me. 12. I have caused
thee to ride. 13. And Asa pursued them. 14. 1 have
indeed (infin. abs.) hired thee. 15. Do not bury me in
Egypt. 16. And let us cast him into the pit. 17 When
thou pourest out thy wrath. 18. He will weigh me in
the scales of righteousness. 19. Fire has burnt them.
20. From my hand thou shalt seek him. 21. And in
great mercies I will gather thee ( / ) . 22. M&y the Lord
keep her from all trouble and sorrow. 23. Seek {in. sing.)
peace and pursue it 24. And I seized hold of the two
tables, and I threw them from my two hands, and I
broke them in pieces before ( = to) your eyes.
CHAPTER XXL
THE VERB(continued).
105.
Guttural Verbs.
Guttural Verbs are verbs in which one of the radicals is a

guttural letter OYy'H'n'N). Certain changes take place in the
vowels of these verb forms, because a guttural cannot take a
Dogesh, and usually does not have a sjsr, especially a sounding
K}> (see rules, 9 and 15, 1). (1) The vowel in front of
the letter that, in the regular verb, takes a Dogesh is
lengthened. Thus: Tl!T a n c * ^5V!S i n s tead f T!P* and
H5W
(2) Instead of the sir, a compound KJK> is used.
Thus: DmOy instead of Drn&tf. When the vowel following the compound $\& is turned into NJK', the compound xil>;
becomes a full vowel. Thus: Hftyft instead ot iH&tffi.
GUTTURAL VERBS.
106.
lleS
The Gutturals consist of three classes ;
A. Verbs with the First Radical a Guttural (5 Guttural),

as 1*2$ 't serve> p!H to be strong.
B. Verbs with the Second Radical a Guttural (called
Medial Gutturals, or )} Gutturals), as 7M3 to redeem, DP!K>
to kill.
C. Verbs with the Third Radical a Guttural
7 Gutturals), as
to send, J^pE? to hear.
(called
107.
The names fl Guttural, y Guttural, 7 Guttural,
derived from the following :
are
The earlier Jewish Grammarians took as their model the

verb 7p3 to ivork, (see upon the Names of the Conjugations,
82, 4, p. 80). Hence they called every First Radical a S,
every Second Radical a JJ, every T/M/tf Radical b.
Thus:
would be described as having a p for its 3 (/.& for its
First Radical, a tO for its JJ) i.e. for its Second Radical), a
^ for its 7 (&>. for its Third Radical), Similarly, when we
say a Verb is an y Gutttiral Verb, we mean its JJ (/. its
Second Radical) is a Guttural.
Irregular Verbs are also named after the same plan. Thus
a Verb like EPJ3 is said to be a 3' Verb, i.e. its 5 (or First
Radical) is a i ; PI/3 is a H 7 Verb, its 7 (or Third Radical)
a PI.
1
114
STUDENTS HEBREW GRAMMAR.
108. A. Verbs with the First Radical a Guttural ( Guttural),

& 0- "OV to serve*
The Piel, Pual, and Hithpael have no variations.
Perfect:
KAL.
11V
NIPHAL.
"Tnsr3
HOPHAL.
0135,3
33?i7
nn^n^rT
J-H3SJ7
J-n33?n
^ninsn
-i^3S n
DJ^13?n
^13J?n
T3W
n-jnyn
m3^n
j-nnjrj
\FH3^n
^3?n
aj-n3??n
jo-psn
NIPHAL.
HIPHIL.
HOPHAL.
7??,?
^755,3
IH^S,?
"J-H3S,?
tcri-pl?
HIPHIL.
nnâ
QJ-H3S3
Future:
KAL.
""OS?
liil?^
nhy:n
'HWri
ih^s
=n?v;
nj-pyri
vosri
njih^n
"Thsw
"D?!!
T^yo
^3?tf
^3?&
*T31?N
^3?rg-rsyj-i
^?s^
rq'pyci
13^3
*P32,! ("OS?)
T3Sp 03?P)
T 3 S n ("T3Sfi)
^T3SP
T3?
|
^35,^
n
?13?^
nT3S,^
;
njrpsp
!
T3S.3
^
=
*0?fl"
^3?tf
^3?tf
13??W
^3y,;
np735?î
ii3y^
nj^nyn
T?J?3
* The hints given in 82 should be applied in the learning of all verbs.

I n the following Tables, where a complete set of forms is not given, it is
understood that the omitted forms are exactly like the ordinary Regular
Verb. Always compare the verb forms that vary with those of the Regular
Verb. See Comparative Table of Verbs, 140, p. 167.
f The Fern, form of the 2nd Plural Perfect, when omitted, can be obtained
from the Mas. form by changing the D into a }.
GUTTURAL VERBS.
Imperative
115
:
KAL.
TO?
^135
TO?
n:nh2
HIPHIL.
NIPHAL
-Qyu
s
T?^n
rosn
n
?73^n
Infinitive:
Abs.
KAL.
"T^y
Const.
"Ti^
TO?:}
HIPHIL.
"T:n
*0?n
T3Sn
NIPHAL.
HOPHAL.
-rnsn
T:
IT
Participle:
KAL.
Act.
NIPHAL.
HIPHIL.
HOPHAL.
T #
Pass.T^y,nTins
109.
Notes:(1) Verbs commencing with M share the peculiarities of
the Guttural Verbs ; in the case of six verbs, however, they are
yet more irregular, and are treated under the head of N"Q Irregular
Verbs, see 120, p. 132.
(2) Verbs commencing with a ") only deviate from the Regular
Verb when a Dogesh is required in the first radical, as in parts of
the Niphal. Thus : Kal 0 # ? T ] , rfr?. ; Niphal, ^ D , be thou
silent.
(3) Many Verbs have ?WD in all the forms of the Kal Future, as
P?C!P'(as well as in the 1st Pers. Sing. "Q^S). See also S"2 verbs.
(4) Verbs, whose final syllable in the Future has
have
generally nriB in the first syllable ; if n n s is the final syllable,
i2
116
then ?UD is the first; as ttT?0-, ^bri?.. In some cases, there i a

silent KJp under the first radical, when it is a n or a n. Examples :
to take in pledge,
în to gird, ^rr., "fcofl.

VIP
to cease.
Dpn to be wise, ESOJ, ^ A ? n j .
ion to covet, ibrr, i b n n ; Niphal TODJ.
bpn
bbn^bann.
ôrr ^0 w w / , -IODJ, -ipr, ^Prn.

V5n to cfe**re, V " 5 ^ , V^CTE, ^blT_.
ntt?n to think, at&CP.; Niphal n # n ; .
(5) The Verb TJEH to turn, overthrow, makes its Niphal "^SH?,
T
: v v 7
; - : .
EXERCISE 27.
A.
1. Write out the Niphal Perfect and Future of ^SIl2. Write out the whole of the Hiphil of pTH.
3. Give the Future Kal, Piel, and Hiphil of IDH, and
the Participles of the same conjugations.
4. Translate and parse: (a) ^nT&SJP!; (b) DWlljttl;
B.
Translate and parse each verb.
btfnip) \?3-n^ ansa
-YPSS*!
2. ib n^-b?-n^
-QÎ
l.
^rib# 'n sa^yi 6. npeipn ^ 3 bens D ^ V5# *H??$* O.

nnbb ?i?^n Q^nb^t m n ^by DBzpq DJ-iyy 7. -^.|yb
.-inn nnn i-npvrn t^lP^l 8.
GUTTURAL VERBS.
117
c.
1. And he overthrew those cities and all the plain.
2. Do not be wise in thine [own] eyes, for men will think
thee a fool. 3. The heart of her husband trusteth {Perfect)
in her, and he shall not lack spoil. 4. The land shall be
divided by lot. 5. I have caused thy iniquity to pass
from off ( = upon) thee. 6. Slay them not, lest my
people forget (Fut.). 7. And A braham rose up early in
the morning, and saddled his ass.
110. B. Verbs with the Second Radical a Guttural (y Guttural),

e.g. 7K5 to redeem*
The forms with N)tp under the second radical, and the Pi el
Pual, and Hithpael requiring a Dogesh in the second radical,
cause the change of vowels in these Gutturals (see 105).
The Hiphil and Hophal are like the ordinary verb (see
Comparative Table, 140, p. 167).*
Perfect;
NIPHAL.
KAL.
b?
nbsa
^83
bSp
nbasa
T
"
PIEL.
bs?
nb^?
^SS
^3
^W.
^feS
Erf?W3
j#*?wa
^bws
PUAL.
b&i
nbyn
i?Sâ
&&
^bsa
*bi$&
J-I1?^
1^b2
o*?ria"
HITHPAEL.
bw?on
nbxôn
nôn
^?^nn
^tfirin
sfceaon
DflVsjorr
âanrr
^S|rtn
* Note the Hophal forms n^NJn, 6 a n , ."l^fcOn , etc.
118
Future:KAL.
bs:r.
bs^n
bsan
^bsnn
bwritf
'ibfcffi
njbsrtn
ibfefii?
mbtfjn
b?5
NIPHAL.
bm>
bân
bw?n
^bwun
b?
bw>
nabMan
SbNSfi
n?b?n
bw|5
PIEL.
b^.
bwan
bwjn
^ban
b^?W'
SbNT
mbfron
Jibsnn
naban
*W??
PUAL.
b&p
bwnn
b&n
^bwan
bsas
^bsr
njb&in
^b&in
nib&n
bsaa
HITHPAEL.
b?/T.
bs|nn
bsarin
^bsann
bsan
sibMarv
nabsann
ibsann
mbyjnn
bNarq
Imperative:
KAL.
ba
"byi
ibwa
njbî
NIPHAL.
bsan
^bsan
!)bw|n
njbw|n
PIEL.
b|
^?
!)bN2
njb?
HITHPAEL.
bssnrr
^bann
nb^|nn
rabw|i7in
PIEL.
PUAL.
HITHPAEL.
~:
Infinitive:
KAL.
Abs. bis?
Const, bsa
bsann
bsa
Participles:
KAL.
Act. b & , n b &

Pass. blNJ
PIEL.
ba
PUAL.
HITHPAEL.
GUTTURAL VERBS.
119
111.
Notes:(1)
Verbs with 1 as the medial radical are irregular in
the Piel, Pual, and Hithpael. They further (a) prefer ETin in the
Kal like the ordinary Regular form: P^P. he will sprinkle, *P?^. he
will burn. So also in the Imperatives: P~>T, "H^S. (b) Instead of
the nna *1PD, the "I sometimes takes a ^ ) ^ \ Thus, compare the
following forms with those of
Perfect Piel of T O : n ? ^ , JD^S; P u a l : n y ^ a , SDna.
Future KB,]: ^lb\^W^.;
Pual: ^ r p V
(2) Many verbs with n, n, or J? as the medial radical, omit the
Strong Dogesh without lengthening the preceding vowel. Thus :
]H3, D m , GOD, "IS?, instead of IDS, DTO, DTO, TtfS. The
Dogesh thus omitted in writing, and not compensated for, is called
the Implied or Hidden Strong Dogesh; it was probably not
entirely omitted in pronunciation.
E X E R C I S E 28.
A.
1. Give t h e Piel t h r o u g h o u t of T ] 3 .
2. W r i t e down t h e Participles K a l a n d H i t h p a e l of
Dili with t h e Personal Pronouns.
3. Give t h e 3rd Person Masculine P l u r a l of t h e F u t u r e s
of t h e seven conjugations of tT\W a n d tDhfe?.
B.
Translate a n d parse each v e r b :
nttJo urn urn nstann -vyip nsi 2. isnfcffi QBhr: i.

Y!W ninety bb *j3 0"]351TpTpS n y p s i 3. TJ^ nam
rrTja ji*S n^-ig e. oa? ^qV*l ^nip? nwnpb n\ntpb9
oâ Tj-ptf 8. ^ 0 1 ^ "^S ^1?? n^n 7. nb nose ]NS*
.^nhn bos? D^tpap \>vsT
120
c.
1. Bless me, m y father. 2. And t h e y cried w i t h a
loud voice, Do n o t forsake us. 3. A t t h a t time t h e L o r d
separated t h e tribe of Levi to stand before t h e Lord t o
minister t o him, and to bless in his n a m e u n t o this d a y .
4. A n d y e h a v e driven m e from my father's house.
5. W h y askest t h o u (/!) Abishag for Adonijah ? b u t
a s k {/.) for h i m t h e kingdom, for he is m y elder* brother.
6. A n d let u s right l i k e m e n . 7. As a m a n w h o m his
m o t h e r comforteth {Future), so will I comfort you, a n d in
J e r u s a l e m shall y e be comforted. 8. Kemember y e t h e
g r e a t a n d revered God, a n d fight y e for y o u r b r e t h r e n ,
y o u r sons a n d y o u r d a u g h t e r s , y o u r wives a n d y o u r
houses.
112.
0.
g. Tw$
Verbs with the Third Radical a Guttural
(7 Guttural),
to send (only refers to verbs ending in T\ or J?, see
113).
The variations of these Gutturals consist of:
(1) The preference for the vowel rt?B, instead of DJIH or *"?.>?.
Thus : rh& instead of Phi?]; rkw\ instead of n\>W).
(2) The addition of the Furtive nrj$ [see o, p. 5), under the
third radical at the end of a word, when a long vowel (except a Vl?ty
precedes. T h u s : JTbEtfrj instead of m b ^ T l ; ribittf instead of
nbitf; iyb$ instead of rabip; nibttinsiead'of nibitf.

(3) The use of the helping nnsj- in the forms of the 2nd Person
Feminine Singular of the Perfect, in place of a #)?', for the sake of
euphony. T h u s : ntf? instead of tfnbE?; nrbwTl
instead of
* Translate for he is my brother, the older than me.
f This helping fTHS is another usage of the Furtive n n s .
121
GUTTURAL VERBS.
Perfect:
KAL.
NIPHAL.
PIEL.
PUAL.
H I P H I L . HOPHAL. HITHPAEL.
nbttf
rnbcrn nbtrn
nnb^ n n b t r nrrbttfn nnbajn
nnbir nnbti;3 nnbtp nnhw nrbwn n n b t r n
w.B.înbtt? ^nbp^ I r-iribw nribw
nrhwn
nrhwn
\nnbttb | \nnbtt? ^rnnhw \nnbtpn v-rnbtfn
rbw
etc.
etc.
etc.
etc.
NIPHAL.
PIEL.
PUAL.
etc.
nbritpn
nnbnpn
nnbtfpn
^nnbtf^n
etc.
etc.
Future:KAL.
nbt&n
rbw>
nbar:
nbp^
ribaJn
rbwn
ribwn i nbtrn
nbt^n
rbwn
nbtzfri
nbtrn
>rbwn >rbwn
^nbtpn ^nbtpn
nb&N
nbtrs
nbtp
nbt**
^nber
Trbtt?>
iribt^
nnbttr*
roribafa rranbt^n nanbtwn njnbtrn
nribaJn inb$ri Trbpi-i ^nbcrn
njnbt^n m n b & n mnbtpn ronbtfn
nbtj
nbtp?
nbgfa
rf???3
H I P H I L . HOPHAL. | HITHPAEL
rrbt^
nbarj
rbwn
rpbttfn
rhwn
mbtrn
*rrbtppi ^nbcjri
nbtt?s
rrbaJs
nnbttr
.irrbari
mribafri njnb^ri
nrrbttto inbtyn
naribttfri njnbtpri
ribpj
irbsfa
!
nbnp>
' rrbnttfn
; nbnttfn
: ^nbntpri
j nbntps
-inbnt^
;njnbEi?to
-inbritpn
njnbnpfi
nbntp::
Imperative:NIPHAL.
KAL.
nbttf
TrbaJ
vrbtp
rorihtp
rib^n
^nb^n
irfwrr
njn^n
PIEL.
HIPHIL.
HITHPAEL.
nba?
^nbttf
tnbitf
njnbttf
nbttfn
imbttfrr
rpbafrT
njnbtpn
nbntt?n
TfbnaJn
inbntpn
njnbntpn
Infinitive:
KAL.
Abs^ n i b ? ;
Const, nb^?
NIPHAL.
PIEL.
ribtfj
nb$n
nW
nbttf
PUAL.
nbtf
nb#n
n^b^n
nbttfrr
nb^n
nbntpn
122
Participles
KAL.
:
jNIPHAL
PIEL.
PUAL,
Act. nbttf* I
| rjbwv
Pass, rnbtp
nbttb
' nbtt?p
HIPHIL. HOPHAL. HITHPAEL.
n^btps
nbtpE
113.
Notes:(I) Verbs with 1 as third radical have no variations.
(2) n'/(?, N"?. Verbs with N or n as third radical belong to
separate classes of Irregular Verbs ( H o , p. 124), and must not be
conjugated like
(3) The Jussive of the Hiphil is rh&l, nbtptf. So also the
forms with 1 Conversive, as H ^ ^ l and he caused to spring forth,
372HP51 and he caused to swear.
(4) The Accusative Suffixes cause some changes in the vowels
in the following forms :
Kal Future: ^rbw
he will send me (not ^rf?tp.), ^ n b ^ or
^rhw\ (not ^nnb$^ o n b ^ ( no t onb^.)Kal Imperative: ^nbttf send me (not ^ O b ^ ) , ^nnbtp, nnbtp,
^ n b p , etc.
(5) Observe the nns t|BQ under the n in Ôb^tf, ^Dbttf_^
^rrbtpN.
(6) Pausal Forms: Niphal n b ^ , etc.; Piel nbtp, etc., nbttf> ;
Hithpael nb/ntJn, nbttp\ (These forms are sometimes used even
when not pausal).
EXERCISE 29.
A.
1, Write out the Kal of V\W.

2. Give the Perfect of the Niphal, and Hiphil of Pl&X
andJD^.
3. Write out the 3rd Person Fern. Sing, of the Future

of the seven conjugations of HJlS and T*?y.
* (/.) nnV& or nnV^, nmhwf nin1?^.
GUTTURAL VERBS.
B.
123
Translate and parse each verb :
^Vin? 2. *P9 b^ rEqhribin ^ r o sb anoB cmb$ Dh: I .

n v^yri pspn ^5 3. ctpjBl ^nb$ ns^wn >aJin>^-n^
rnp^ri nnn^ ^rpiai TjiN ^n$s spai TN 4. bn^. ^5.3
05119 n-ins i^fj 6. 7-iaf? b | rn^ri ^ 5 b? sn:pn ?jb *? 5.
bss nsT] 8. s?nb^ >??n nbtps ^p n# 7. vyrbq^ DjiaP?
b | bs nvnri nnzn ]ias 9. nn ib ^s n?bn-ni^ n^n
C.
1. I t is better to trust in the Lord than to trust in
princes. 2. The righteous man shall flourish like the palm.
3. And they rose up early in the morning and they sware
one to another, and Isaac let them go. 4. Have I not
caused thee to swear by the Lord ? 5. Ye shall not swear
by my name to falsehood. 6. For the Lord of Hosts has
sent me unto thee, as he hath sworn unto thy fathers.
CHAPTER XIII.
T H E VERB(continued).
114.
T h e I r r e g u l a r V e r b (see 77, p. 77).
There are two main classes of Irregular Verbs:

A.
Those in which one of the radicals is assimilated or
absorbed in the letter following it, called Imperfect or Defective

Verbs (DnDPl).
124
B.
Those t h a t have one of t h e Quiescent letters ''VPI'N
(see 4, p. 4) as a radical, called Quiescent Verbs (D*H3).

115.
A.
The Imperfect or Defective Verbs comprise :
1. }"S* Verbs, as J?J3 to draw near.

2. y / ; y* Verbs, or
B.
(Reduplicated), as M D to surround.
T h e Quiescent Verbs comprise :

1. K"S Verbs, as h^X
2. *"fi Verbs, as 1W
to eat.
to sit.
3. )'y Verbs, as Q)p to rise.

4. X"b Verbs, as KXtt to find,
5. H"? Verbs, as
to
reveal.
T T
116.
I.
A,
Imperfect
or
Defective
V e r b s (DHDH).
J"S or 3'S **1DH (i.e., Defective in the F i r s t Radical
which is a 3); e.g., E^|} draw near.

The irregularities of verbs, whose first radical is J, are as follows :
(a) The oniUsion of the 2 in the middle of a word, wheu, with a
Silent NVf under it, the 3 closes a syllable. Thus : tt?31 instead of
ttfcfl, T ? n instead of T J ? n , VBl instead of VQ31, >J?l?8ia (Niphal)
instead of ^W?JJ3; tt?|0 for ttf|?B. Wherever this J is omitted, a
Dogesh is placed in the next letter.
(b) The omission of the J in the Kal Imperative, and in the Kal
Infinitive Construct. Thus : fife for B&3, n # 3 for ttb?.
(c) The addition of H ^ (or, with a Guttural, r i r , J"I373 from 3T22)
to the Infinitive Kal,
* For explanation of these terms, see 107. p. 113.
3//2 VERBS.
KAL.
NIPHAL.
Regular.
mi
nafeo
nwn
W2?
^nw^
Future:
KAL.
tt?3fl
HIPHIL.
t^jn
rrir|n
F\WZ71
PITOH
nwzri
nran
vnran
sittran
\n73n
13^33
NIPHAL.
HIPHIL
vjsfe?
HOPHAL.
ttfin
rrttrw
w^n
origin
7tftP|n
soipin
1tt7|5
Dnti?2D
125
aaân
7$?fen
13^|H
HOPHAL.
Bran
Regular.
tt?3$
npipgn
Imperative;
KAL.
njtpari
^33
tP33
HIPHrL.
( n # 3 ) ttfe or tt?3
Infinitive:
KAL.
HIPHIL.
Abs. t^33
win
Const. n t p j * w^ri
HOPHAL
ttfan
mrt
I (nw^ri) tran Participle ;

NIPHAL.
773tp3 or H3^3
* ( w i f iw5)
rntran
I HIPHIL. ) HOPHAL.
126
117.
Notes: (1) The Piel, Pual, and Hithpael are throughout regular (see Comparative Table, 140, p. 167).
(2) The Hophal throughout has the vowel f ^ P .
( 3 ) T h e V e r b ^ 5 to fall, has
Kal Future
Imperative
bS2
]i!3
Infinitive Construct
(4) The Verb ]Cl2 /o grc'ye, has the following forms:

Kal Perfect ] 0 ? , n j r f l , n n j ( = r^flT) (also abbreviated to
nriri), riro, ^ n j ( = vjiijnj), wpj, DCITO, ^ n j .
Future 1 C V fCltf, ]#*.

Imperative Ifl ( n ? ^ ) , *W, W ? .
Infinitive ] i n ? ; Construct HW ( = njfl) [V-lfi my giving, ifiJ-1,
etc.].
Note form iHu? fo grê.
npb
(5) The Verb Hpb 0 taê, is conjugated as though it were a

y'DVerb.
Kal Future n p \ nj?fl, nptf.
Imperative n p (Hllp), T i p , -Tip.
Infinitive Hipb; Construct H n p ptfDP).
Niphal is regular n,f?:),npV ; Hophal np>.
(6) Some y'S Verbs, especially when the second radical is a
Guttural, retain the 2 in every form. Thus : from vH^ to inherit,
Kal Vp. ; Hiphil ^rfpr^n; f torn 3HJ ^0 fe#d, ^ n ? \
EXERCISE 30.
A.
,
1. Write out the Kal of }r0 and p||T>.
2. Give the primary forms o the Future of ^33 and
3. Write out the Hiphil Perfect, Future and Participle
of hty and * m
* Observe the idiom ]P\) ^D ( = who will give?) in the sense of " 0 would
that!" or (i 0 ! that I had." Example:31V l^^P would that it were
evening !
3"D VERBS.
B.
127
^n?l 6. V?J? 5. innp5 4. l$ni 3. TO?} 2. b^ 1.

n^?i 12. yjbrr 11. ra*:} 10. ys9. nTjn 8. nj^rii 7.
G.
?jb Tan 2. ^ w rrfin ^n-bs 1 ) ?p3K ~>P^ ^3 VKW 1.

>? nn?p tjbp1? im 3. *T^P ani1* 'n r\m nift-np ens
b-iMtt; &3!i 4. syn-b^ ^7951 nins 23b ysiini nvr} mn
nps nn$ 6. t^3"i$n ttfn3 ^3^1 ~itfps srftfii 5. inxQs
-ns i s m D^?5P3 bsnp>->^ vyis bp npQ n^ 'nb s-in
gsfr Di-iMsi npa \2D ^051 7. b ^ n snv-ia-nsn anso
]nb ^ n 9. tthpa nnaJ1? nsygn-bp DJji?fcQ is 8. opwiH
^riri nits 10. i^n3 n~jn3 vnbsn:i njniDjtf rea#j n-n is
-ns? ^b ^riri oyflii? n . i n stt?>sbnnw >nn$ tjb nns
^Tnpjp â?SJ? biwt?3 7^ ^ 12. opb -inpn Wjnb3
n^p ^Vsr? wn rmn iyy\ nyn Tp ^b>-?n ntf# 'n 13.
.ntn ^rcbgn
D.
1. And Abraham rose up early in the morning, and he
took bread and a bottle of water, and he gave to Hagar,
and he sent her forth. 2. And Saul took the sword and
fell upon it. 3. And they sowed fields and planted vineyards. 4. Only with thy eyes shall thou behold. 5. Who
beholdeth the earth and it quaketh; he toucheth (fut.)
the mountains and they emit smoke. 6. And she did not
tell her husband Nabal. 7. And he drew near and he
128
kissed him. 8. I t is b e t t e r t h a t thou shouldst not vow

t h a n t h a t thou shouldst vow a n d not pay. 9. A n d y e shall
t a k e a bunch of hyssop, and dip fit] in t h e blood which
is in t h e basin, a n d cause [it] to touch u n t o t h e lintel and
u n t o t h e t w o doorposts. 10. W h e n I give m y sword i n t o
t h e h a n d of t h e k i n g of Babylon. 1 1 . A n d t h e Lord
gave to Israel all t h e land t h a t he sware to give u n t o
their fathers.
12. Deliver me from t h e w o r k e r s of
iniquitj^. 13. O would t h a t (see footnote, p . 126) all t h e
people of t h e Lord were p r o p h e t s . 14. Tell (fern.) me
w h a t t h o u h a s t in t h e house.
118.
II.
A.Imperfect Verbs
(continued).
y"y or DV^lSS (reduplicated), e.g. i 3 p to surround.
The irregularities of Verbs, whose last two radical* are alike,

are :
(a) The contraction of the second and third radical into one, as :
s a p for W p , 2D for ^ 5 p .
(b) The Dogesh, compensating for the omission of one of the
radicals, is dropped if the radical is at the end of the word, as :
n p (not 3D), 20) (not Sip J), but top, s a p ; , sap?, etc.
(c) When the pronominal suffix begins with 3 or ^ , * a vowel is
inserted before it, in order to render audible the Dogesh of the final
radical. In the Perfect, this vowel is Djin? a s VTi2D, SDi3P3. In
the Future and Imperative, the vowel is ^ 9 with ^ following ( V ) ,
as ny^Dj-i, rn^pn.
(d) The ** added in the Hiphil in other Yerbs is not found in this
class of Verbs.
* Called the heavy suffixes.
TV
perfect;
KAL.
PIEL
NIPHAL. (PO-EL).
ap2
aaio
ap
nap
niap
niap
\niap
lap
cniap
irriap
îap
napj
niaos
niaos
vviap?
cniap::
jfliap?
narpo
main
rnaio
^nnniD
âaio
Dnnnio
IJ-DaiD
1312103
503310
siapj
129
VERBS.
PUAL
(PO-AL).
HIPHIL.
HOPHAL.
a3io
naaio
main
n33io
^nnnio
âiD
DrmiD
ltf33iD
2QV
napn
rhaon
niapn
\nisprj
apîn
a3inpn
naainon
nao-in
naainpn
niacin
rminpn
niap^n
VYiap-irr ^ a a i n p n
lapîn
laainpn
cniap^n D r m i n p n
lOiap^n 7i535inprr
wap^n
s)333wprr
^'orj
niapn
jniapq
toiaprj
J0331D
HITHPAEL.
Future.
KAL.
3D1
abn
abn
optf
ab$
np>
Vfjjibff
:
*apn
nj3bri
rib?
PUAL
(PO-AL).
PIEL
NIPHAL. (PO-EL).
HIPHIL.
HOPHAL.
np^.
ap^
ab^
aaho^ ;apvornp\>|
aaio*;
a3i^P^.
apn
apîn
n3ion
spn
abri
aaio^
33'viPfl
n3ion
abri
apn
apvi
aato^
spn
a3inpn
^33ioî
>abn
âpn
3PW
^33iDî
oainpn
^3P^
aaioi*
ap$
nb
apîs
aaio*$
a3i^ptf
-lap j
iap^.
iab>
SQ3WP1
siap-v
n j ^ p f l n a ^ p w nj33inpn
nrâpn
n ^ a ^
T : :
âpn
sasrioj-i
lapri
!)2riDJJ
siapvi
larn^pri
nj33iripn
n j ^ D f l n2>3pn nroaio^ n j 3 3 i o ^ nyspsi
ans
a3it>:>
ao-12
aaino?
ab?
^P?
1 Imperative::
KAL.
NIPHAL.
PIEL.
ao
apn
âpn
lapn
ro>3pn
aaio
"Wto
nano
nrqaio
âb
-iab
HITHPAEL.
'^
HIPHIL.
HITHPAEL.
^pn
^?pn
iapn
a3i^pn
>aainpn
laainpn
n533i^pn
nj^spo
130
Infinitive:
KAL.
Abs.
ninp
Const.
2D
NIPHAL.
PIEL.
PUAL.
niDn
25>n
roiD
nnio
>i
HIPHIL. HITHPAEL.
*2Qr\
nrnnpn
??
??
Participle:
KAL.
2?D
NIPHAL.
2D3
PIEL.
nyiDE
PUAL.
SniDZp
^PP
nsap (/. ntti)
np-^
nninpp
119.
xVo/es.(1) The forms 2% ^fetf (Kal) are called the Chaldaic
or Aramaic forms.
(2) The Piel, Pual, and Hithpael forms, having the vowel
throughout, should more correctly be named the Po-el, Po-al, Hithpo-el (see 95, p. 106).
(3) The Kal Future with 1 Conversive changes to ^P*l, ^pJ?l.
The Hiphil Future with 1 Conversive changes to ^ ? * L
(4) The Kal Future with Accusative suffixes changes to s ?5p%
JinSpV The Hiphil Future with Accusative suffixes changes to
(5) Some verbs remain regular in the Kal Perfect ; as from EftT
to intend, ^ ? ) J ; from TtSL to take as spoil, ^.tTS. Of ^ 5 p , the
?followiug forms exist: ^ 5 p he surrounded, and * ^ ^ p .
(6) Many verbs have regular forms for the Piel, Pual, and
Hithpael. Examples : n ^ \ he will praise, vvrr^P praised, M?bnFI
you will profane, ^yLTfT he will boast (praise himself).
E X E R C I S E 31.
A.
1. Conjugate t h e H i p h i l of Dfti^.
2. Give t h e I m p e r a t i v e s of t h e N i p h a l and H i t h p a e l of
y"y
VERBS.
i3i
3. Write out the Hithpael Perfect and Future of prt and

TT3.
4. Give the 2nd Person Feminine Singular Future of the
seven conjugations of *1*V2 and DD&.
B.
rifiy. 5. iirttVpn 4. nrpn nv 3. ipm 2. w 1.

/"is^ 10. W ^ 9. -ibb 8. is Êtf-bN 7. nj^WU 6.
C.
nnno sigiDji 2. 'n-bs b*?9Wl -i^n bs ^35-nN ng?i 1.

ins nrfyO) 3. trsn vjgp E'H? rofts/r D^pipsrn vnnn
iEl?2b 'n n-n born 4. ^nsnr-i obis n^n D?\rrnb 71b nn
tens nan ]rpp-ns *r??b nn \nibnrj 5. n n2D25
bps ^5 7. C M "nJp'STiM ^ ? m i : ]h n ^ - n s \narn 6.
-bs 9. n?-]N D^QS r n -r^ s. ^ n Jimj ni npjrriy
bbn^n V-ron ^tp-ngi ^Pitnpl 10. nnDES "tfn bbnrn
D.
1. This day I have rolled away the reproach of Egypt
from off you. 2. Pass ye and surround the city seven
times. 3. And Aaron was silent. 4. And they plundered
the camp of Syria. 5. Not like the covenant which I
made ( = c u t ) with them which they have frustrated.
6. And I will desolate her vine and her fig. 7. And they
profaned my holy name. 8. What is this evil thing that
ye profane the Sabbath-day?
9, Our brothers have
caused our hearts to melt. 10. Everyone who passes by
thee shall be astonished and shall hiss.
K 2
132
CHAPTER XIV.
IRREGULAR VERBS (continued).
120.
B.Quiescent Verbs (DW).
LK"fi or fffi TIJ, *.?., SsK to *r*.

The peculiarities of verbs whose first letter is N, are:
(a) In every conjugation, except the Kal only, they are treated
like Q Gutturals (see "D? 108, p. 114).
(b) In the Kal Future the first syllable has ^ 5 ? followed by
^ D 5|$n:i as ^D., OT^J, îtjBfl.
N.B.(c) In the following six verbs there are additional irregularities, viz., 73N to eat, ~>N fo say, "QN to perish, TH^ fo seise,
HDW fo consent, HDS fo &e.
In the Future Kal the first vowel is D^n, as b ^
Ae will eat.
In the 1st Person Singular, when the X would occur twice, one X
is dropped, as
120a,
brfa for br>H.
Kal F u t u r e of o r d i n a r y N"S Verbs:
*pg
*P$#
fpfcjft
^pwn
^bfc?
^Dtf>
m=?b^n
isp^n
n^byn
tfHSJ
Imperative.
*P8
>2DW
^SpM
n
??b
Infinitive.
*liDM Absolute.
Fp^ Construct
M7Q VERBS.
120b.
133
Kal Future of the four Irregular Verbs, S^X, "TOM,

b?N v
Imperatives.
br>sn
^bps
^b?s
robbs
^bssn
robpsn
ib^n
njbssn
7
bb
Note.The
Infinitives.
biDS Absolute.
- b b Construct.
Pausal forms
of the Future: b j N ^
bpwn, ^bsstt, sibjri^ -Sbprfn, bp3.

Observe the forms ,")ris,l and "lBri!
awe/ Ac 5020*.
verbs H 2 ^ to consent, and HDS /# bake, have the
same peculiarities as
in their first radical, but, in the second
syllable, resemble T\"? verbs (see 127, p. 147).
Thus, Kal Perfect,
7-QW, n m , HON, ? , etc.; HEN, nriBN, i T S , etc. Kal

Future, r Q N \ PQSn, H3N, =0***, n j ^ f i ,
etc.; nDN>, HDNP,
ns's, ^ s \ m^rin, etc.

EXERCISE 32.
A.
1. Give in full the Kal of
11K.
2. Write out the Hiphil Perfect and Future of ^3*$.

3. Give the seven primary forms Future of THX and
t)DK.
4. Write out the Hophal Perfect and Participle of Ifitt
and 1DM.
Note the form
0 say, saying.
134
npg a^nan >TO bsî n^bcp nj^B? ]^9ffl ^
l.
^nr nsyb? 4. /TOP nn^n s^nn tr^n-n^ v-nasrn 3.

nwr nbsb bfcntp? N??-btf ^?î 5. ^rnin vjrfc D^ttha
^9^*1 6. YIW 1 "^ ^Bft? n^n^n bsp -ibpsn n^ n;nn
niD^ nbM DS 7. " ^ ">tf*l ^1?^ ^"33^ -ittra iv br> b
*Tvf? ^ 8. ^ - n y i ^ntps-n^ îtf-nw vwn$ ^35*7
QJ-OBBff rfb ^ 9. H!?n-ris nhsi!l b^tjrrb?-n$ *pg;i
nnps-n^ Tjb^n nn^^. 10. bhn?r) ^3 vpvb ^ttf^pnb >s
.Deafen bsD
C.
1. The hope of the righteous man is gladness; but
( = and) the expectation of the wicked man shall perish.
2. For ye shall certainly perish speedily from off the
earth. 3. And Isaac loved Esau, for there was venison
in his mouth, and Rebecca loved (Kal Part. Act) Jacob.
4. And they said unto him, "Say now Shibboleth"; and
he said " Sibboleth"; and they seized him and slew
(tanttf) him by the fords of the Jordan; and there fell at
that time from Ephraim forty thousand men. 5. And
I will send forth fire against the wall of Gaza, and it
shall consume the palaces thereof. 6. And Moses said
" When the Lord giveth to you in the evening flesh to
eat." 7. Every male among the priests shall eat it ( / ) ;
it is most holy (=holiness of holinesses). 8. And Delilah
said unto Samson, "Tell (with cohortative n) me with
what thou shouldst be bound." 9. Put forth thy hand
and seize its tail; and he put forth his hand and he laid
hold of it. 10. Thus shalt thou say unto the children
of Israel.
135
v'D VERBS.
121.
Q u i e s c e n t V e r b s (continued),
V/
v/
S or
Tl3.
I I . T h e r e are t w o classes of Verbs V ' S :

A.
Those t r e a t e d as t h o u g h t h e first radical w a s a 1, and
which were originally Y'S Verbs, as 3 B ^ to sit, }?*T to know.

The irregularities of t h i s class are :
(a) I n t h e Kal F u t u r e , I m p e r a t i v e and Infinitive, t h e first
radical is dropped, ^B^ # instead of ^ B ^ ; !2B*; H^B*(#) I n t h e Niphal, H i p h i l
appears.
a n d H o p h a l , t h e original 1
N i p h a l S B ^ i instead of i B ^ J ; i B t y instead
of S B ^ . ; H i p h i l y e n r i ; H o p h a l SB*|Pl.
So also fre-
q u e n t l y in H i t h p a e l , as JTllJin.
B.
Those t h a t are strictly
B^5^ t
oe
'i3.
Such are i t s * to fo #00^,
dry, T*p! t ciwake, ^ ^ to form,
to be right.
p^
to suck, and
1$\
These r e t a i n t h e first radical in t h e Kal a n d
H i p h i l : 2Q*\, i*tpV.; in other respects t h e y are like Class A.

Perfect:
CLASS
*") (originally
A.
)").
KAL.
nttTj
NIPHAL.
1WK
HIPHIL.
HOPHAL.
HITHPAEL.
n^n
sawn
ntôn
etc.
etc.
etc.
etc.
etc.
HIPHIL.
HOPHAL.
HITHPAEL.
etc.
etc.
etc.
C L A S S B.
KAL.
etc.
*"fi.
NIPHAL.
etc.
136
Future:
CLASS
A.
NIPHAL.
HIPHIL.
HOPHAL.
HITHPAEL.
etc.
etc.
etc.
etc.
KAL.
NIPHAL.
HIPHIL.
HOPHAL.
HITHPAEL.
etc.
etc.
etc.
etc.
etc.
KAL.
etc.
CLASS
B.
Imperative.
CLASS B.
CLASS A.
KAL.
NIPHAL.
HIPHIL.
stp
qp
ntpnn
oahn
ine?
rorja?
nafarr
ni&in
qîpin
Jaîn
rtûnn
r\;^wyi
KAL.
HIPHIL.
^SP"!
WU
q>t^n
etc.
etc.
HIPHIL.
HOPHAL.
^1
Infinitive:
NIPHAL.
KAL.
Abs.
nttrj,
nit^
C o n s t . riStt? p J = D # ) ,
.ntpin, n ^ n
Participle:
KAL.
NIPHAL.
HIPHIL.
HOPHAL.
137
/'S VERBS.
122.
Notes.(1) 'a. Of 2tt?;. The Kal Future with 1 Conversive
changes to S t ^ V the Hiphil Future to ntpVI.
(2) 6. Of ^ .
The Kal Future with 1 Conversive is n ^ ; the
Hiphil Future is S t ^ . l .
TfbrT
(3) The verb ^7*7 to go, is conjugated like a *"fi Verb.

Kal Future TT^.% ^ b n ( T j ^ ) ; Imperative ^ (or rp 1 ?), ^ b ,
HJpb; Infinitive Absolute TfibrT; Construct n p b ( V ^ S ) .
^ ,
Hiphil Tpbin, -pbv (^bi>V).

Hithpael TyyniTirT Ae walked to and fro, ivalked about.
N.B.Note the idiom ~)iDrT) Tjibn (both Infinitives) going and
decreasing, i.e. gradually
decreasing.
(4) The verbs )W) to sleep, and EH^ to inherit, have Kal Future
jar*, ] E W ; an.^., ttTpN; both thus resemble, in the Kal, Class I I .
(o) A few verbs *"S resemble, in their peculiarities, f verbs,
particularly in their Hiphil forms; such are p?J to pour out, iHSJ fo
ftMr, ^
to stand, 2lSJ to place. Kal p'SI; Hiphil p^SH, JTBil,
^ ? n , r p ? n ; J ? n n becomes J-1S71 (like n i | , p. 90, footnote).
( 6 ) The
b!r
verb
to 6e #&/e, has, as its Future, the Hophal

forms
The Kal Future does not exist.
HDS
CO ^ u e v e r b Î^T ^ ac?c?, to continue, is frequently joined to
another verb to express the idea of again; (a) either with the
Infinitive, as n i f r s b :>NON Plpi*l arcd Âafc again did, nhw P]ph
nji 8 '/!"/!^ aftd ê again let the dove go; (b) or, with the finite verb,
^B*- and Elijah again said. The verbs S W to
return, and HD*7 o increase, are used similarly.
Examples:
b h T ) ^ v?2 DH !)351 !Q51tt75 and the children of Israel also ivept
again; D W ? / HSri/l he did abundantly.
E X E R C I S E 33.
A.
1. W r i t e o u t t h e 2nd Person Masculine P l u r a l F u t u r e
of t h e K a l and H i p h i l of # Y , *^7T\ a n d
11$.
138
2. Conjugate the Infinitive Construct Kal of J^V, with

all its Accusative pronominal suffixes.
3. Give the Perfect Hiphil and Hithpael of ^7H and
B.
vrnirTi 5. n:p?M 4. ^n^^nn 3. ^J-pb?^ 2. T>bin 1.

vn^-b *p^ STinn:? 8. D^tpiE 7. ^55*5 6.
C.
ngteb W3 nnbs-ng 75*1 t^sn-n^ rt&b nwn bwvi 1.

n^nb-i nsbbn nswb^ rhnb b?^ nriftb ^ss> âJn? 2.
ttb^j-n ^ndsn -ibsb nziftri by$ iTjvw Q??TT n^^^- 3.
n^ri*? 5. na^M p SHN n^s 4. vby nbd nw# I T
din 'O DD^58 ^ n nbwb ^mbirfp^ ^b t^sn bsd bisd
-i^ p 17-TD yiT>n nbsrr nny^rr ^s-by ib i|5i nw npb
Tfbpri Tjb^n vpya nt^n -ids rnsarn 6. m^TO-ny siTnin
pbnn rrbs .npri*! 7. "n!?8D ^pya "9^n npî v-itjft nnft
-nâ Tir ^b -157 ?ipin-bs 8. tjbs -uarirn n-|n d^n or
;
n r n j s n^ cib^nb b?^ rib cnnw Q?p? 9. n-m
.Nntpyi inpna bsi ^rrpin *T?N? bw 'n 10.
D.
1. Come,t children, hearken to me; the fear of the Lord
I will teach you. 2. Thy ways, O Lord! cause me to
know; thy paths, teach me. 3. And the thing was
pleasing in my eyes, and I took from you twelve men, one
man to the tribe. 4. And we said, We cannot go down : if
our young brother is with us, then ( = a n d ) we will go down.
5. And were born unto him seven sons and three
* according to the tenor of.
t Use ^ 7 .
fy
VERBS.
139
d a u g h t e r s . 6. And t h e y ( /.) sought to go to walk to and

fro in t h e e a r t h ; and he said, Go ye, w a l k y e to and fro
in t h e e a r t h ; a n d t h e y ( / ) w a l k e d to a n d fro in t h e
earth. 7. A n d t h e d a u g h t e r of P h a r a o h said u n t o her,
" Take qSn, HiphiT) t h i s child, a n d suckle it for me, a n d
I will give thee h i r e " ; and t h e woman t o o k t h e child a n d
she suckled it. 8. A n d you h a v e forsaken me, a n d you
h a v e served o t h e r gods, therefore I will n o longer ( = 1
will n o t continue to) save you, 9. And Micah said, N o w
I k n o w {Perfect) t h a t t h e Lord will do well w i t h me.
10. A n d I led you in t h e wilderness forty y e a r s to i n h e r i t
t h e land of t h e Amorite.
123.
B.Quiescent
Verbs{continued).
I I I . W i t h 1 as t h e middle r a d i c a l ; )'y, e.g. D*lD to arise.

The irregularities of Verbs )"V are as follows :
{a) The ) frequently disappears, as it is quiescent.
{b) In the Piel, Pual and Hithpael, the third radical is doubled
in the forms E ^ P , EEftp and DpipiTin.
These conjugations are
called Po-lel, Po-lal and Hithpo-lel {cp. Verbs y"y).
(c) In the Perfect of the Niphal and Hiphil, the forms i ^ p ? and
iD^prj are used before the heavy pronominal suffixes, i.e. those
commencing with n or J {cp. Verbs V"y).
There is a class of these Verbs called *"JJ, as *P5 to understand.
These prefer the * as the middle radical in place of the 1 in the Kal.
The tables will show the difference between Y'V and *"JJ Verbs.
Many Verbs that are ^rV are also at the same time )"y, as E^P or
DW to place, W>tp or WW) to rejoice. Hence CTtplJ and D-WJ, VT>V*
and WfoT.
140
V'y Verbs.
Perfect:
KAL.
cp
n?P T
npp
J?SP
^WP
NIPHAL.
nipa
nîpj
r\ia-ip5
m*ip3
vrwytp?
PO-LEL.
Qttip
H^S'lp
riDftip
T : " '
npEnp
^nspEip
rap
raip?
raeip
DflPp
DfllfcsipS
7^tosip3
WEflp3
DJTOEp
W?P
^7?p
ir-ipErtp
13^P
PO-LAL.
HIPHIL.
DErtp
nspip
;ro2ip
D^pn
na^pn
JTOfcip
^paip
ni^pq
m^pn
\nwpn
^ptf
QCiipiDIp o g w p r j
7fl9B*lp I t f W p r j
^wprr
^pfcip
raeip
HOPHAL. HITHPO-LEL.
Dp^n
Dîpi-in
mapsin
rrosipcirr
riftp:in
j-ittnipi-in
: 'T^ttipCin
J-iPR^n
^JTOi?in ^ n ^ S p r i n
rap=in
rapipnn
Dtfpp^n D E P B p t f n
^9p-nn ^ p ^ i p n n
^pp^n
soBEipgn
T
*"JJ Verbs K a l Perfect.

J3, n j a , TO5, W S , W 3 , ^
Dflfn, toa. [Also: ^ 3 , n ? ' 3 ,
n i ^ ? , rfâ, ^ i a ^ S , ^ S , a p W ? , ^ 5 . ]
The other forms are
like those of O^p.
Future :
KAL.
~ Wfl\
MpJ?
D^lpn
ra^pn
Diptf
S)WpJ
n^^pn
wipn
wpj
NIPHAL.
PO-LEL.
Dip*!
V)
nipn
Dpipn
apipn
ra&ipn
Dipn
raipn
Dip
opips
Ittpip^
. sifcip'*.
njîpri njppipn
ranpn
rarppj-i
Dips
Qip3
PO-LAL.
HIPHIL.
D>
raîp'j
Px
aîpiji
D^piJI
D^pn
Dipi-i
raeipj-i
^'ptt
apipN
D^pH
rapip^
^P:
m w i p f l nraprt
TOQIpJ-l ^ p r i
DN
Dip3
i?3
*"y K a l F u t u r e .
V5J, ]vnp], NP3T1, V 5 $ , ^ 3 ? ,
like VS.
HOPHAL. HITHPO-LEL.
DEnprr
DpV
npvi
nmpnn
np^n
Enpon
rapiprirp
DOipOS
rapiprp
nrapiprin
?)^pnn
Diaiprg
rapîn
cp^
rap^
rauppvi
rap-in
Dpsfc
r ? ' ^ , ^ n n , ^53.
The rest
fV
VERBS.
141
Imperative:
KAL.
NIPHAL.
[no*p] D-p
>Wp
wip
Dipn
$p
7
PO-LEL.
HIPHIL.
opn [ n ^ p n ]
Qip
WpTl
êp
^PF
^pri
nj^pn
laeip
^>pn
roDprr
rgipiDip
: ' T
HITHPO-LEL.
Sip/prr
êipon
DDffipW
njeoiporr
y I m p e r a t i v e Kal.
^ 5 , v ^ ? , - ^ 3 . The rest like )"V.
Infinitive:
NIPHAL.
KAL.
Abs. Dip nipn (Dip3).

mprr
Const, tflp
PO-LEL. HIPHIL. HOPHAL. HITHPO-LEL.
Dpn
Q9P
D^pn
Dp-vr
nnpCin
>y Kal.
Abs. 7 3 , Const. V%. T h e rest like 1"]/.
KAL.
*np,D-ip
NIPHAL. PO-LEL. PO-LAL. HIPHIL. HOPHAL. HITHPO-LEL
Dipj
Dipo
Dpipp
Dj?IB
aiptf
*"y exactly like O .

124.
Notes.(1) V'JJ, Kal Future with 1 Conversive, Dp*! or Dp*!;
Kal Future Jussive, Dp;; *"?, ?3>T!, ]3J.
l"y, Kal Future with Accusative Suffixes, ^Wp 1 !; *"tf, Kal Future
with Accusative Suffixes, ,OJ>3,,:.
(2) Hiphil Future with) Conversive, Dp*!; Hiphil Future Jussive,
Dp."}; Hiphil Future with Accusative Suffixes, ^9 N PV
(3) Many of the forms of the \'V Verbs resemble those of the
"V Verbs. Thus in the Hiphil; of ) % VTtopU; y"J>, ' - O ^ P D .
Compare, also, the Po-el of the V"V ( n ^ D ) with the Polel of the )"V
* Fern., TOP.
142
( d 2 i p ) ; the Po-al ( t o ) with the Polal (O&ip). Hence, some

verbs appear to derive their forms from two roots, as 5 ^ and VV"! to
be evil, af=ltt and t&'gH? to/ee/.
rfift
(4) The Verb rfiE /o die (Hiphil, to cause to die, to put to death,
to slay), has the following forms :
Kal Perfect, HE, nnn, n.Pl&, ^ , -inq, ^ O B ; Participle, n $ ,
Hiphil Perfect, n^n, nn^n, ^ n , (rpflsoi), ^nÛ, Dtf^rr.

All the other Kal, Polel, Hiphil and Hophal forms are like Cflp.
Sin
(5) The Verb N12 is to be found among the Doubly Irregular

Verbs, 136, p. 160.
tth2
(6) The Verb ttWSi to be ashamed, has, Kal ttfel, V?ip2l ; Future,
afc?, ttfnp, wn?..

Hiphil, (1) ttron to JM* to Aame. (2) ETOSn (as from a root
E7^) o &g _pw o shame, TTtp>'D.')'n she ivas put to shame.
E X E R C I S E 34.
A.
1. W r i t e out t h e F u t u r e K a l of I t l a n d D*B>.
2. Give t h e 3rd Person Masculine Singular F u t u r e
Hiphil of DVl, w i t h t h e accusative suffixes.
3. Give t h e I m p e r a t i v e s Kal, N i p h a l a n d H i p h i l of
Mtf, 30* and agfl

B.
P a r s e a n d t r a n s l a t e :
*T09*nS 5. ^ysfrji i?in 4. 3n?.i 3. ^ p r p 2. nb^j i.

.a^h?b 7. Djpnqa 6.
nnm 2. nbsn DV-QTO HEK rra4? "ram msan.vwi l
nysnn ^nnr ibnsn nn^t^l ^nin>ritp ^ i bs ^*n DJTP
nb ib stnntoî ift?$ b^wtf? -irn^p^ 3. #nb mjpsi m ^ N
OH TH nnn apro n ^ -i#8 inrr^-ns 'n Dp>i 4. ^)bs
arro? trips pan n r n p . D ^ ttpabtf 5. bbotp* D?-bp ntpsn
T
"
: -
i'y
VERBS.
143
njs niw Dtfi 7. ^b^&n Q^prjq a^tfe ' j a w ^ ^fjE-i 6.

apy rram -lannar! ribi v*?y55 "TO-TH nk'bip bior-iE s-in
-bs npan ii^rf^ 8. fiov ^by? mi bpD? nwri nwx is
.nil )>bji nri-rn ^ p ^ n Ty-b# n^Dj") sa-npb iîTH
1. And Kuth said, " Entreat ( / ) me not to leave thee
( / ) , to return from after thee : for where ( = to that
which) thou goest (/tit.), I will go: and where thou
lodgest, I will lodge: thy people shall be my people, and
thy God my God." 2. And Samson said, " May my soul
die with the Philistines," and he bowed himself (3*1) with
might: and the house fell upon the lords and upon all
the people who were in i t : and the dead which he slew
(FViti v.) in his death were more than (those) that he slew
in his life. 3. And he lifted up the mantle of Elijah
which had fallen from him, and he returned and he stood
by ( = u p o n ) the shore of the Jordan. 4. The Lord
maketh poor and enricheth: he bringeth low, also he
raiseth on high. 5. Therefore I set my face like (the)
flint: and I know that I will not be ashamed. 6. Let
the king Solomon swear to me that he will not* kill his
servant with the sword. 7. And there escaped not from
them a man, except four hundred young men who rode
upon the camels, and they fled. 8. The avenger of
the blood, he shall slay the murderer: when he meets him,
he shall slay him. 9. Dan shall judge his people as one
of the tribes of Tsrael. 10. And my lovingkindness shall
not depart from him, as I removed [it] from Saul whom
I removed from before thee. 11. And he shall say on
* See 94, 3, p. lOt, upon sentences expressing an oath.
144
t h a t day, " Behold, 0 God, this is [the one] w e h a v e hoped

OD^p) f o r n i m > a n d h e will save us. This is t h e Lord, w e
h a v e hoped for h i m : let u s b e glad a n d let us rejoice i n
his salvation." 12. A n d t h e Lord will scatter y o u a m o n g
the nations, a n d y o u shall be left few i n number.
125.
B.Quiescent
Verbs(continued).
I V . W i t h K as t h e t h i r d r a d i c a l ; K " S , e.g. X& to find.

T h e irregularities of X"7 Verbs a r e as follows :
1. Owing to the fact that K is the third radical, and cannot he
preceded by nri3 ? this vowel is changed into YPT when the X is
the last letter of the word. 2. I n front of the heavy pronominal
suffixes, i.e. those commencing with 11 or i , the vowel is, in the
Kal Perfect only, a YPr. I n all other conjugations, the vowel is
r S (in the Perfect) and ^HD (in the Future). Examples:N2E
(not ? ? ) ; Q W ? P (Kal Perfect), n s ^ ? (Niphal Perfect),
mMSen (Kal Future).
tfh Verbs.
Perfect :
KAL.
W2E
NIPHAL.
W^7D2
PIEL.
39
nHBB
ns??tt
nsp
$?P
WW
ntWQ
\TiN?ft
n2M
nssM
T
" ;
nN893
V^HSW
>)WSE
1MSP5
DC1S80?
^WS5
i5
DflNSJS
SOHSM
^s
DO?^
towsia
PUAL.
HE
nH
naÊ
nD
W S E
SINBB
nnsgn
SDNBB
HIPHIL.
HOPHAL. HITHPAEL
s^nn
sân
N?wn
nw^^n
nw-^nnn
ns?an
n?pn
ns-?Dnn
rw$?n
n5?Dnn
nw?pn
ntxsnri
^SDi7 v n w ^ n v^sgBOn
JiN-mnn
siMS^n
^san
DOWS9H Dn85!i Dn8on
wÊn
%8Pii
SOHSBOH
145
hfb VERBS.
Future:KAL.
N2P1
wspn
w?Ptf
t: :
NIPHAL.
NSfc1*
PIEL.
NSW
sspn
PUAL.
NSE^
^7*>n
N*?PJ?
Bn
-^Dn
^ p n
NÊtf
W2W
HBBN
M2BH
NSEn
HZTpn
N^Ptf
nMset
njKSPtf nass^ri
issEn
JiNspn
n j s ^ p n njws^n
H^P?
NS93
N?np
>
^?^ :
njHaw-i
isapn
JIMSE *
IN^tt^
rrussEn
is^pn
njs^pn
*??
HOPHAL.
NSE*
^?P!
K^pn
s>2pri
^?P)
b^SPN
naNsnn
^sspn
rraw^Mi njMSoî
M8W
HIPHIL.
H^W
ssEn
sssn
>s?pri
NSEK
1M?^
np^prn
is^pn
mNSEJn
S?P2
HITHPAEL.
HS&W
s-?pnn
Ns&nj?
^s&pnri
8eriM
is?pn>
n^p/pn
is-HDnn
n^pcin
S8W5
Imperative:
KAL.
N2E
^?P
!|NSP
TON^P
NIPHAL.
??n
^ B H
:
IT
j njNîan
PIEL.
NS
^?P
^ P
mssp
HIPHIL.
HITHPAEL.
w?pn
>s^pn
^S?n
rraHsen
Nuprin
^pcin
^?pnn
ms^pon
HIPHIL.
HITHPAEL.
s^pn
s^pn
NBiann
Infinitive:
KAL.
NIPHAL.
Abs. NiS*?
Const. S^P
Participle :KAL.
NIPHAL. PIEL.
PIEL.
N^P
PUAL. HIPHIL HOPHAL HITHPAEL.
N>2PP
NSp;j
sspriE
1 2 6 . Notes:(1)
Some verbs N l have H-f as the last vowel of
Perfect Kal, t h u s : N^D to be full 0 ^ 9 , DtfNbp, etc.), NPTO / 0
fo unclean.
(2) Kal Future with Accusative suffixes does not contract, as
vjtfSpi ( n ot ^mW).
(3) Some verbs take a D in Infinitive Kal, thus: n ? P , nwif?.
(4) The Hophal Perfect is a!so ??<! ; Future N ? P : .
L
146
EXERCISE 35.
A.
1. Write out the whole of the Hiphil of XEOPl.
2. Give the Imperatives Kal, Niphal and Hithpael of
X7p and *nj3.

B.
njjan sj-np^n nnp) ô^pub ^ Vis?? a?j339 nbsb i n b
s
5 \ n ^ n bw-iEtp-btf b-istp -iiprii 3. n3n31 n/iEQ J-Ptfyi
nfcri*! 6. n r ^ o nj# ib nsb$ i s bs|^ sb DSI 5.. niiN'^91?
7^"!?8 nerim 7. V?H?? â>4^ 'WiN ^ n ^ n ^n;bw b# nsns
-P8 H. Yw ^b ^_w nnn ^5 snip ^bT]snp >ESO <b msnpn-bw
.aass tfiji 9. Vnpbn sb D^bsan n.qs ^Me? **b npsn
..V^si 'waftn n#i#) 'n ^s?") io. irvD^B siparn isb
0.
1. When thou goest to-day from me ( = from with me),
(and) thou shalt find two men by ( = with) the grave of
Rachel, and they will say unto thee* "The she-asses are
found which thou hast gone to seek." 2. And the days
of his mourning passed, and Joseph spake unto the house
of Pharaoh, saying, If, I pray you, I have found grace in
your eyes> speak, I pray you, in the ears of Pharaoh,
saying. 3. Only the sins of Jeroboam, the son of Nebat
who caused Israel to sin, Jehu turned not from following
( = from after) them. 4. And she dwelt in the midst of
Israel unto this day, for she had hidden (fcOfi, V.)
the messengers whom Joshua had sent to spy out Jericho.
5. May the Lord give thee according to thy heart, and
rfb
VERBS.
147
fulfil (Fut.) all thy counsel. 6. Now ye have consecrated

yourselves ( = have filled your hands) unto the Lord,
come near.
127.
V.
B . Q u i e s c e n t V e r b s (continued).
With n as the third Radical, H 7, e. g. p] / 3 to reveal.
The irregularities of H"7 Verbs are as follows :

(a) H.In all the Perfect forms the H is preceded by the vowel
yg, as nb|, rrbsa.

(6) H.In all Future
forms, the n has the vowel
thus
(c) H.In all Imperative forms, the H has the vowel ^.X, thus
nb, nb|n.
(d) Hi.Except in Hiphil and Hophal which have ^.X, all
Infinitives Absolute take D^ffi, thus I. rib|, H . r f a p , I I I . rfb.
(e) ^ . A l l Infinitives Construct, end in i"Yl, thus nib?, nib|n.
(/*) Before the heavy pronominal suffixes, i.e. those beginning
with 3 and i l , the H disappears and ^ takes its place ; thus, O ' l
instead of
(This form, according to the regular verb, should
but the ** prefers the vowel P^n in front of it, hence 0 ' ! )
So also QJTv>3 instead of O f i ? ^ , n j ^ j r i instead of nji^JJ-l.
(g) In the 3rd Person Fern. Sing. Perfects, the radical H is
changed into a H in order to prevent two H coming together, thus
instead of
(Ji) Observe that in front of a 2, in the Futures and Imperatives,
the vowel is always VlJD, thus n j ^ J - l , H J ^ n .
(i) There is a form of the shortened or apocopated Future, used
in the Jussive, and with the *! Conversive, and formed by dropping
the ending H? changing
into bj*i, nb?n into bv?l and he
went up, n j 5 ^ into 19s!! and he turned; U2V1 (Jussive) let him make,
but, n^?55 he will make.
L 2
148
PI" 7 Verbs.
Perfect :
PUAL.
HIPHIL.
HOPHAL. HITHPAEL.
nb|
nnba
nnb?
mba
(n^bs) /rba
n4|
rvb-i
/rba
n^bar:
mb?
^Tbaa (vrb-i) vrbs >mba
nba
sib?
^33
vrba
Dirba
OJ^ba
DOÎ
l^ba
10^3
on^bi 10^33
^b?
wbaa
5)3^?
wba
nb^n
nnb>3n
j-rbnn
nb^n
nbann
nnb3n nribiorr
n^n
n^bnon
ns
,
niacin
^? 7
vrb3rr ^/rbaon
^n
ibinn
D
C^?<7 rvbinn
Wban
^bnn
^bann
NIPHAL.
KAL.
nb|
nnb?
PIEL.
nba
nb>5?
nnba?
" .
mbsrr
vrban
iban
QiTb?n
lA^n
wban
Future:
PIEL.
PUAL.
HIPHIL.
HOPHAL.
V^ s
nb^ :
nbw
nbyn
>b^
nbas
*$
n^b^
^totf
nrb?rn
nb;p
nb?n
nb^n
^?3n
nbas
Vw
nj^M
ibjn
n^ban
nbaa
nbjj
nbjn
nban
^n
nbas
^:
nybjjj
sibji?
njibjri
nbaa
KAL.
NIPHAL.
nbai
nb?n
nb^n
''ban
nbn
nb|p
nbsn
nb?n
>b?n
nbas
nbjfl
nbatf
4iP
nba
*r.
A*
^3>
rry^wi
^bsfl
nj^n
nba?
ra^b?^
ib?n
n^b?n
nbp
rg^tfi
^batf
nrpbatf
nbaa
V??
HITHPAEL.
nbsni
nbacin
nbaon
4acin
nbaotf
na>bann
ibacin
na^baon
nbana
Inoperative :
KAL.
nba
>ba
sib?
rtrba
NIPHAL.
PIEL.
nbs
''bin
?ib|n
na*>b?n
Mbi
na^ba
HIPHIL.
HITHPAEL.
nb^n
'ban
^ban
nj^b^n
nbacin
sibaon
na*>bann
rfb
149
VERBS.
Infinitive:
NIPHAL.
KAL.
PIEL.
PUAL.
Abs. rib?
Const, nibs
rib}? nba, ribs

nibs
nibs
niban
Participle:
KAL.
NIPHAL.
nba,* ^b|t
PIEL.
nb?n
niban
PUAL.
HIPHIL.
nb^D
rhyo
nb?5j nb?^
nb?n
niban
nibann
HOPHAL. HITHPAEL.
nban^
128.
Notes:(1) When an Accusative suffix is added to a form ending
in H, this n is dropped. T h u s : **39S answer me, instead of ^3/125;
he will bring them up, instead of
The forms of the
Future with Accusative suffixes are: I. ^ J ! ; I I I . ^ ? r . ; , V . N ^ .
(2) Rare Infinitive Construct forms: n k j or * S , for f l l f e j ;
niq for nVri; in# for nin^.

(3) The following shortened forms of the Future, "being of frequent occurrence, should be learnt by heart:
Kal:
n ? ? to weep, ^ ? . 1 (for '"5*1).

HD? to build, p .
rnî fo e ^/-z/, ~irrn (for nnn?i)

Hpn to encamp, ?n?5.
nbr
bsn (both in Kal and Hiphil).
Hp^ to answer, )*}<
n b s to make, do, .
HSn to 5 e e , H^V}, *q*0, wn?. Jussive.
Niphal: HPTE fo &/0* o ^ , H E n (for n n E t f ) .
P i c / : HD? to cover, D p ^ (for n 5 ^ ) .
H ^ to command, y$V\.
* rhi {/.), o ^ i , nfei.

n ^ D ? Dâp, HI^P.
t n ^ | , o^f, rrt^|,
t nbjj, D^D, m^n.
The other Participles change similarly.
150
Hiphil:
Hithpael:
n y i to be much, ^H?.!.
nfjttf to water, ptp*l {see below, Note 6).
b|CT for nV>3tf\
(4) Imperatives, following the example of the Future, have also

shortened forms. Such are
Piel: y& command, for H ^ ; 731 for n b 2 .
Hiphil: ^ I H multiply,
6rm<7 up, for
for H l s n n ; ^ | i n / ^ alone, for HQ")?! ;
*"*?"}
(5) The Verb n y j ^ 6e much, increase, has three forms of the

Infinitive HiphiL Fl^yi, used as an Adverb, much; rVSlJl, used as
Infin. Absolute, as in *"f|nN n2T]rT I will surely multiply; iliSTin,
used as Infin. Construct.
TiriW
(6) The Verb HHtt? to drink, takes the Verb njjtj? for its Hiphil
forms. nf}t?7n he caused to drink, watered; HjJtJP (P?fcl), HptpE.
nr^tt?
(7) The Verb nritt? fo iow, has the following peculiar forms :
Hithpael Perfect:
Hiqpltpn ( = nnQPltprr.
The radical n
has become a 1, and no change has taken place in the vowel
before the n). n ^ D n t p n ( = J T ^ O S t f n ) , VTlDElfrT, -Tiqatftt,
Future:
n j O S t ^ . (shortened into *nfltp>V), n J 0 # f l (Sin0#fl),
mnn$s, nirjntjK, Tiqntfi-i, nyjqstffl, njqetjfc?.

Imperative:
71)n F\W71 y
Participle: niq/ntpE.
^HFltpTl.
Infinitive:
niqntpn.
(8) Note that the forms nV$P_ and n ^ S ! are the same in the Kal
and Hiphil.
(9) The Verbs Hjn to be, and Hjn fo /we, are to be found among
the Doubly Irregular Verbs, 129, 130, pp. 152, 153.
rfb
VERBS.
151
EXERCISE 36.
A.
wsri 5. vrja-i 4. "Oib?5 3. VTE? 2. ^jpws? 1.

.W!?l 10. D ^ ? 0 9 9. nj^jnrntp 8." N"icn*7. flK 6.
B.
1. Write out the whole of the Kal of HJy.
2. Give the whole of the Piel and Pual of PlJX.
3. Write out the Hiphil of HiO.
C.
nivg sniiâr 2. -fQW-iri -ircw vnisb??') vrnVbj -insaJ?! l.

vj5 byr? ngjg *pv nte^y-nsi 3. m n wsn niatp sonay
spsi nap -itpg nVus?n n&bp? Dr>t??2 snnij D H M bsn^.
1?^"bs 'n-btf n?j*i Ye ng?ab "in*!! 4. Ttarj ^3? ^SO
iris HEE? ^ b h nbsb i ^ s Tjbp i??i 5. Dnrop-b^
rr ba^ 6. Dtp so??.') ^b?.1 Qip9 Errban nw$ Dâqsnp
nj5 npbtt; isrirn iTTl? nsa+ TT ?ysibn-n si^_ osbn 'ys-ny
n ^ rib1! D^D-ID ib n^rri ^b p-i 7. vsrf? ^nntcfy Tjî
/rotrh roDi nsrrn 8. D-ID nisnn 7mb nonsa nvn-n
:
: : > :
T :
'-'
: -
I -
; -
T T
vt
bb^b inib? *rv tthb ^ w i - b ^ pan nTTTl yhv ijtnbab

rib'OWB âan b*nttr ^nbs nins 'n nas nb pb 9. nint&bi
i3?-n " i ^ r n 10. nayb D^pprn rrasb n-jn D^n-ny
.D^pnb TT v^yj ^nn nwvb nsnn E?n;n pisn ttfss
T
..
..
...
[ ..
*s.
D.
1. And David commanded (to) all the princes of Israel
to help Solomon, his son. 2. And they wept until
OBW IS?) there was no power in them to weep. 3. And
he said unto him, Behold I will make thee fruitful and
will multiply thee, and I will give thee for a company of
* See 128 (3).
f n * V-
See
P- 1 3 7 > 5-
U s e Participle.
152
nations. 4. To see thy face I had not expected; and

behold God has shown me also thy seed. 5. And they
burnt incense there on all the high places, like the nations
whom the Lord had exiled from before them, and they
did evil things to provoke to anger the Lord. 6. And
Hannah answered and she said, Nay, my lord, a woman
heavy of spirit am I, and wine and strong drink I have
not drunk, but I have poured out my soul before the
Lord. 7. And I will cut off thy idols and thy standingimages from the midst of thee, and thou shalt not bow
down any more to the work of thy hands. 8. And the
anger of Balak was kindled against Balaam, and he
clapped his hands, and Balak said unto Balaam, To curse
my enemies I called thee, and behold thou hast certainly
blessed these three times. 9. And she fell upon her face
and she bowed towards the ground and said unto him,
Why have I found grace in thy eyes to recognise me,
and I am a stranger.
CHAPTER XV.
129.
Doubly Irregular Verbs.
The two principal are ;

1. IT Pi to be, become, to come to pass (PV 7 Verb).
Kal, Perfect: rift, HJVP1, JVft, JVVl, TPPI, VPl, DJVft,
153
DOUBLY IRREGULAR VERBS.
Future: Sing., JTPP, STPtfl, -P1.V1FI, *Plfi, prPlK; Plural,
vn\ nj^nn win, n m

: |-
v : |-
: |- '
v : r
Shortened forms: VV, Vtfl, TIN.

Observe TP1 (1 non-Conversive); TT1; pausal T]*V
Imperative : IT!!, \TI, VPl.
Infinitive:
n \ l and Vll abs.; fiVPl const.
Participle: plTl, PlTTl ( / )

Niphal, fo become, to be made of PlTlJ, PlfiTl}.
N.B. When forms commencing with a /fa5 *)tpn have the prefixes
3, 3 ' or 1, these prefixes take the vowel P*yn and the first radical
(H) has a sounding N}5p instead of a ^ P . Thus : 0^^^^^. (and not
E O ^ m ) , ^ i ^ ? l , Hi^nl?, *Vh the exception is n?.ni'(/wjer.).
Note.HPtfE (and not niyTO) (see 111, p. 119, for the dropping
of the Dogesh without lengthening the vowel).
130.
2.
PlTl to live (n//L> Verb).
Kal, P e r / ^ ; JiTl, PinTl, JVTl, Wl, DIVTA, M*n.

T T
'
T ; |T
'
I |
. F t e r e ; HTP,"iVPlfi, V?* PlTlK, N T , P U ^ f i :

Shortened forms: TP (TW; pausal *?T1), ^Plfi.
Imperative:
PITH,
.. : . Wl,
_ VHV
:|.
Infinitive : JTfi or VH absol.; nVH (nVfH) const.

Piel, (to permit to lice, cause to live), Perfect:
Pl*H, JVffl/
vn, DJTTI.
J t o r e : f l W , iTPU-l, HJPItJ, WT, W W l , ^rifl.
Imperative:
PPH ( ^ H mwse we to &W).
154
Infinitive:
fiV
const.
Participle:
n*lllb.
mv\*\, Perfect: irnn, nvnn, w^nn, Drrnn.

Imperative: iTll!l, Villi.
Infinitive:
Hi
For the Future and Participle, the PiW forms are used.
Notes.(1) There is a Verb ^ n to live (of the class V"V) which
is very similar to Hjn. The chief forms of Îtf are: Kal, Perfect
^n Ae Zwes, with 1 Conv. ^H} (pausal ^CH) sometimes ^fT].
(2) Be careful not to confuse the Adjective (used frequently as a
Noun) ^n living, with the verb forms.
(3) The rules of the Prefixes 1, ^, 3 and v are the same for the
Verb n;n as for n;n.

131.
Verbs that partake of the irregularities of two classes.
A.Any Irregular Verb that has one of its radicals a Guttural, assumes the peculiarities of the Guttural Verbs in addition to the irregularities of its class.
Examples:JJJ13 to touch; Kal, Inf. Abs.y yiJJ; Inf. Constr.,
T\n; Hiphil, y\a!l, $&; Q"S and h Guttural).
y T to know; Kal, Part., y f ;
Jw/ Con**., J i n ; Niphal,
Fut., JflV (instead of SPIV); ( 'S and *? Guttural).

H to r<?*; Hiphil, ITJPt * IT3& (Y'JJ and S Guttural).
nSy *o <7<> up; Kal, frSfi!, nSs?; Niphal, rh$\
Guttural).
* Also MP!; Future TO! (n31) ; IT3D.
(PI'S and S
132.
B.
155
(a) J"S and N"S Verbs.
1. K33.
The Kal forms are not used.
The Niphal forms
are translated to prophesy, to speak as a prophet.

Niphal Perfect: N | 3 , n X M ; Future N } ^ ; Infin. N23nS,
Hithpael Perfect: K | J n n , *nN33n (== ' H N ^ n n , see 94,4, c,
p. 105); Future, K3J1V ; Participle, tiSSFp (N33p).
2. X&) to carry, bear. Kal Perfect, nXE>3, 1KBO; Future,
KB'*, 'IKE" and W&fi.
always omitted.)
(In these two forms, the Dogesh is
Imperative, bt&, *NE?; Infin. Abs., KJ?3;
Infinitive Const, nNG? (HNB'S); Participle, NEn}; JVqpfcrf

Perfect, am;
133.
Future, Kfe^; Hiphil Perfect, I K ^ n .
(b) J"S and H"1?.
1. ntDi ô stretch out, incline. Kal Perfect, Tl*t33, ^ 3 ; all

T T
'
T '
'
other forms, except Future, like PI' S v e r b ; Future, p9* (B?1),

On (shortened from HtSFl); JVtpAfl/, Perfect, *JVfcM, VIM;
F u t u r e , ^ . ; Participle, Pit?}; JBi]pAt7, Perfect, PlOPI, ^ t e H ;
Future, HO! (fcl), PlOtt (DW);
Imperative, HtSH (BPI);
Infinitive, HitSH; Participle, PltDlb.

2. PpJ fo strike {Kal not used); Niphal (rare). PI33 ; Pwffi
(rare), JI3J; chiefly used in Hiphil; Perfect, P13P1, rV3!l, DJV3P1;
Future, H3! 0[1), P13X, EM;
Imperat., ^ H ; Infin., iTGPl
Participle, n 3 ; Hophal Perfect, PI3PI, W ^ n ; Future, )y ;

Participle, H3p.
156
3. nDj to try (only used in the Piel); Perfect, HDJ, W S } ;

Future, HIM*; Infinitive, n i M ; Participle, HMD.
4. ilpj to be innocent (the Kal is not used); Niphal, Perfect,
PIJ9J , PlJlM, WI53 ; Future, n ^ ; J%/ (fo declare innocent) ;
Perfect, HJ33; Future, njM*.
For K"S and H'S Verbs, see 120b, Note, p. 133.
EXERCISE 37.
A.
VTB5! 5.
^T?n io.
^ 3 .4, 1T1371 3. . D'S^n 2. ^nJT] 1.

nn;^3-9. warn. 8. .nsw 7. vriDjib 6.
.npnvn^ 11.
B.
sb asi nsrr 7153 sy? sb 7? rms^ s^n nstonn tztean u
"pbr 5tthn n r p i i njnn vby |7i5n npis 7571 7*153 M"91
V3 nisb ni^nb anb ^rira ^ninaarns "DJI 2. n>n^
^3?"bs saan DIS 73 3. ato'ina TT- ^g ^3 nsnb Drn?^
7r$b 4. 'n -151 ro?# oabp ^3?b rn$si D^saan bsni^
o^nbsb D^'Tf? ao^ni \ni?p-b|-ntf 0 0 ^ 5 1 'HSW
naisb Di> DV D^|ns YIW^S QH^ n ^ Q>p;n ngpsa 5.
\ns?nn-ris onyTj nattf D ^ S I S Dp^cibis-ns WJ?TOtpbai>
anb ijpton 7. Dbi^ ^nns -is&arn oâfrri any?? -isip 6.
Drib nnb *FI;TIH nstpa na?t? n w ^ 1 n ^lV (^ ^<0 ^ V
Dtptotp*i9. nsy nba$ rrarn n^ntfj ^ s SEW sws) 8,
N
n^_ 10. ; Vhj ^33 rawi bip swip?} D^nb^n \agb nn^rr *T9
î??? TJI 3tt?ii pbD^n-n^ nisns n$ in*) b-istp nte nq
sj-tyrT ->s*i rr-btf si^bs bbgo?l ^btf ^TI?.I 11. D?J# D ^
D?*I 12. sorbs -i3i? D^"5153 Djy D^1?.?3 n-to îan-ritf
157
D^btf -vn?i D^y ntinq bp bbfi?i QD^ll p-nna stpirn

nten ^b^b rii I?BV'n D#}1 13. niynny D^sn bp
ar^ ^ n 7 Q W n7^J7 D ^ -inbBto 14. issb b | hnfc
3; ^pv-n# Qfr?m: ob -)bb nni -V)?n Vnn 1339
'n 0N5 ^ ?TÎ ^3 15. *i&rn crâm rnn ^?b lyb?
TJS Dtp ^yYisppp -i#8 nîsn bp? nb? n(ptf ^ Tj^pinb
rnm 16. *jip* sb n,^. &?ftpb *p;-n5,!l nbp rrfrs^ wb Tyn's
Q^rfbs ^.ps npbb n n i n ^ -irpn^m soar} ttswn ntes
Di>2 D?9B ^ . r r 17. cnb ninnttfnb-i D7351? nnn
.v>;pb njnsi -WP? ^ s bi#n
C.
All forms of the Verb TO BE are fo 60 translated by fTPl1. And Jacob arose and he lifted up his sons and his
wives upon the camels. 2. And the food shall be for a
store to the land for the seven years of the famine which
shall be in the land of Egypt. 3. I will be to him for a
father and he shall be to me for a son; when he doeth
iniquity then ( = and) I will reprove him with the rod of
men, and with the strokes of the sons of men. 4. After
he has been sold, there shall be redemption for him ; one
of his brethren shall redeem him. 5. Hear ye me, Asa
and all Judah and Benjamin: the Lord is with you when
you are with him ; and if ye will seek him he will be
found by ( = to) you, and if ye forsake him, he will forsake
you. 6. For there shall surely come to pass (== be) the
thing that he proclaimed ( = called) in the name of the
Lord against the altar which is in Bethel and against the
houses of the high places which are in the cities of
Samaria. 7. May the Lord be with us as he was with
our fathers; may he not leave us, nor forsake us. 8. And
158
Saul said unto David, " Behold my eldest daughter

Merab, her will I give to thee for a wife; but be to me
valiant, and fight the Lord's battles " : for (== and) Saul
said (Per/.) Let not my hand be against him, but let the
hand of the Philistines be against him. 9. And the
women who were playing answered and said, " Saul has
slain ( = smitten) his thousands (with prefix 2) and David
his ten thousands" (with 1). 10. And David put forth
(== sent) his hand into the bag, and he took thence a
stone and he slung [it], and he smote the Philistine in
( = into) his forehead, and the stone sank into his forehead and he fell upon his face to the ground. 11. And
now lift up a dirge for the princes of Israel. 12. With
(the) interest be gave, and with (the) increase he took:
and shall he live ? He shall not live: he hath done all
these abominations, he shall surely die: his blood (Plur.)
shall be upon him.
CHAPTER XVI.
133a.
Doubly Irregular
Verbs(continued).
C. ''"SandK'V.
1.
Wt\ to go out:
Kal Perfect W\, *PNX\', Future
n3KXJ3; Imperative XX, niPNX; Inf. Abs. XV,
XT,
Const. nXS ;
Participle XXV, (/.) PIKXV or nXXi\

BxôSL Perfect X*XP, rttWlPl; FuturefcTXV(KXV1); Imperative X^lH; Infinitive N ^ P I ; Participle KVtflb.
Hophal Perfect WftT\; Participle fcWlft, ( / ) T\VC$fo.
159
2.
ay
to fear:
Kal Perfect $y9
*11K*V; Future
7 f t , 7 K , P l ^ f l , W ] " ; Imperative xy,
)Hy;
tn",
Inf. Abs.
tir\\; Const, myf?.

'Nij>ha\ Ikture JTfifi; Participle K i l l
134.
i^.-S.Avoid confusing N*V with Plfcjn to see, the forms of
these verbs being somewhat similar.
of nan: Kai jtaw* n*rv, *n*i, ann, Nnw, ^ 7 1 . *

Of 7 T : Kal Rifare 7 % j n ^ (or *)!), WTfi, 7 J ,
^ 7 * 1 or W l ' V *
Of H 7
n f i , n^Nnpl; ^ 7 (Kal i ^ r e ) .
Of 7 T : J|K7Pl,n3M7J?; ^ 7 (Kal Perfect).

135.
D.
*"S and n,/k7.
1.
r n ^ fo praise (used only in Hiphil; and in Hithpael in
the sense of to confess).

Hiphil Perfect n T i n , VT1ft, WHttl; Future !"HV ; Imperative
yfh;
Infinitive nVfln?; Participle 11*110.
Hithpael P*r/fectf n^lJlH; -FWwe rTllflV

2.
n*V to Arow (used in Kal and Hiphil, but in the Hiphil
it more often means to teach).

* The context alone can decide which verb is meant by these forms, which
are precisely alike.
160
Kal Perfect m TT
\ W T ; Future 7T\",
rVVJ;
Imperative JTV;
T
. ; ' ,T
.T'
'
. :
Infinitive 7T\\, HI r ? ; Participle THY.
Niphal Future ppl**.
Hiphil P ^ c t f n-JIH, ^ n n i H ; Future ,TlV; Imperative PHin
03*11!"! tocA me); Infinitive
Participle ITllO.
136.
E. V'y and H"b.

Ni3 fo come : Kal Perfect N 3 , HN3, DN3, DN3, TlN3, 1N3;
^
'
'
QnN3, U N 3 ; Jbtorc N 3 \ N13N, 1Ni3\ n3Ni3R

V T '
Imperative fc{3, ^ 3 , INS; Infinitive JOS (/IN3);
'
Ni33;
T
Participle
K3, HN3, DW3, friN3.

Hiphil, to Jn'wgr, case to come:
Perfect N*3n, nNân,
nxan, n*an, ^wan. w a n , DnNaq, OKW[Before Accusative Suffixes the following forms are used:
From N*3n; ^N*3n he brought me;
W3n.
FromnN3n = r\N*3ri; un*03n, Dnfc*an.

From *nan = *rtt*an; vnfc*3n, irnân.
From W i n ; D W 3 n : from * $ ? ! = W * W n ; DUN*3q.]
Future W3* (N3l), N*3N, W>y,
nJW31jl;
Nan (with n - nxon), w a n , W3n ; //. 4*.

N*ani7 ( D N ^ 1 ? ) ; Participle W 3 , DW3&.
Imperative
xan; Cowst
Hophal Per/*rf KaVl, TWjn, naVT, 1 X 3 ^ ; JWnre N3V;

Participle Na^D
161
EXERCISE 38.
A.
snn 5.
Djavjn? 4. w^?! 3. 0 ^ n 2.
10. nsi*rri 9. ?^n 8. -wi?l 7.
^ i V i 4 . ^rnin 13. w s i n i 12. na^n-i
^sn^. 19. T*TTM 18. nYTirfp-i 17. "nto 16.
DJ/^NSS
rq.ia 1.
^T^ 6.
n j ^ 11.
w j l 15.
.^shni 20.
rnwp iH793i JOPIN .nays "lysrn ^ns T ^ P ^ ^ 5 nnv) 1.

N1P*1 Vby Q,*3?W ^ P9SOnb *1P?* ^ b! 2. WM5
vrr$-b$ ?ipi> y-nnns ifltf ^ ôy ribi ^bss ar*tf b? -isîn
-n 205 sifry nrit TTO"1^ ibg *iPY*"b rhng nNi 3.
n^-n riinsb im *)pv wh*i 4. l?a? n r i s -ihtob-iB ? T ? ?
Darn jyj? Ylâ -IMJI n^b -ltjtoj-byi nn\nt\ ajtfsi ^nsi: ^ s
V1B5 ^b nnt?hb HEE? wn nns nwx vin >s 5. 1 0 Y"""tf?
n^p^rT') Tjj-]rn^ yn?n ntt?N Q^p D 0^ : " ^ win nn?D
ia Q^nbw 'n norr; ")$*$ nipapn njrn 6. p-w 733 ibri?
nDOS n-is? ^?is nt7s: b?-n$ n^?n HEE? Dtp to?f ]3ttfb
a^Tn nn?p bb'j 097; nonry\ njyywyo EÔWI Qîjbto
nsTOn-b^ Dtf*38l D H?^ O?0 a^siwj 7. 'nb r ^ n ngjs
-by ani ^n vibpfr ^?7B2 nnb nj viNEa â Dai .
nisnsn bsb ^n ^ns rcnTi nbn nnt ^nna ntrs vnNn
T
-.
T T
-:
T T
V"?sn-bs bvrwt rms-b^ D?O$ V50S 'n *>a$ >? any Tl 9.

nv&-b$ tpbn 10. Dyflinyb nns nnb ^-rnj viNqft nttfs:
n i ^ ^ n nns-btf 'n JTS anisnni Dniw H275 ta^pnn
M
162
vriion v\n*rij? ?is v r n ^ >a$ >a$ n . ?vT nnis n^ptpni

>a$ b$iipi ^np np?p_ nttn *&vn bs 12. isrn irbsni.
^s ?i^y ^ s-prrbs 13. bsn^ aJtrjp Tyburn 'n QS? TJ-nffi
*p/-i;piDfi n TSHn? Htf T ^ f t s T#b$ ^ s 2 2tftpn-bs
risp' *\ipv rrhjT] -wiin D^nbig ?f? ^nin u . 'pis r ^ S
"a ^9tp-n$ ntrinV ^92 "iSP^P nsîn 15. TtfiHbiM
'n ^lis sînn ni>2 n^7î: 16. ^V ^ 3 0 ^ CI^TTC n^-pi
ai*n bj âbbn n^ribss 17. ^Btnrfi ?T9S nfef; ? rn?as **:>
*[;P ^Tx] HI ^ ^ " n ^ Pnw ^01. is. nbp rryia ab'^b Êah
bsnt^ vj? nbii? b?-n$ i>b2 n-r-inni >nn T*yrantrsn bs
nbtpi n^ranras-ibp ans 70?! on^rr b?b c^y tfg b|-n^ :
nittpp m"5 ^srw ^T^n^ ' n ^lin 19. nna'iftn ^nytir>sT3
C.
1. Confess ye your sins this day. 2. Before she came.
3. Let us go before him.
4. Behold we will praise.
5. And he taught them. 6. She will go out. 7. Do ye
not fear.
8. He will be feared.
9. He brought me.
10. When he came.
D.
1. And he arose and he went to Zarephath, and he
came unto the gate of the city, and behold ! there was a
widow woman gathering sticks, and he called unto her,
and he said, " Fetch, I pray thee, for me a little water in
the vessel that ( = and) I may drink." 2. And Elijah
said unto her, " Fear n o t ; go, do according to thy word :
but make for me thence a little cake first ( i l ^ N ^ S ) and
* 'Pzsziip;
$ee 14, p. 12.
DOUBLY IRREGULAR --.VERBS;-
103
bring it out to me; and for thyself and thy son, thou
shalt make afterwards." 3. When the heavens are closed,
and there be no rain, for they will have sinned against
thee, and they (will) pray towards this place, and will
acknowledge thy name and turn from their sin, because
thou wilt answer them. 4. And all the congregation
brought him forth until without the ( = unto from without to the) camp, and they stoned him with stones and
he died, as the Lord had commanded Moses. 5. And the
children of Israel said unto them, " Would that we had
died* by the hand of the Lord in the land of Egypt, when
we sat by the pot of the flesh, when we did eat bread to
the full for ye have brought us forth into this wilderness to kill this congregation with (the) famine." 6. It
is good to give thanks unto the Lord and to sing praises
to thy name, O Most High ! 7. And the priests were
standing according to (hv) their offices: and the Levites
with instruments for (=of) the song of the Lord, which
David, the king, had made to give thanks unto the Lord,
for his mercy [endureth] for ever, when David praised
through them ( = in their hand). 8. I will give thanks
unto the Lord with all my heart: let me declare all thy
marvellous works. 9. I will acknowledge thee among
the nations, O Lord ! I will sing praises to thee among
the peoples.
10. And they stood up in their place
( = upon their standing [Inf.]), and they read in the
book of the law of the Lord their God a fourth part of
the day; and a fourth part they were confessing and
worshipping unto the Lord their God.
* = our dying, Infin. Const.
M 2
164
CHAPTER XVII.
137.
Hebrew Poetry.
The poetical books of the Bible are:

The Latter Prophets, Psalms, Proverbs, Job, Song of Songs,
and Lamentations. Poetical passages occur in many of the
other books. In the Pentateuch there are the following:
Genesis iv. 23, 24 ; ix. 25-27 ; xxvii. 28, 29, 39, 40; xlix. 127. Exodus xv. 1-18, 21. Numbers vi. 24-26; xxi. 17, 18,
27-30; xxiii. 7-10, 18-24; xxiv. 3-9, 15-24. Deuteronomy
xxxii., xxxiii.
138.
Hebrew poetry possesses neither rhyme nor metre.
Its
chief characteristic is a peculiar construction of sentences
called parallelism. This consists in expressing the same idea
twice in different language, either in one verse or in two succeeding verses. The ideas are then said to be parallel to each
other. Example:
: *3&to f J^na ywoh niK ny

" How long\ 0 Lord! wilt thou forget me for ever?
How long wilt thou hide thy face from me ?"
(Psalm xiii. 2.)
This form is called synonymous parallelism^ as the ideas ex-
1()5
HEBREW POETRY.
pressed in the two halves of the verse practically coincide.

When the ideas are contrasted with each other, it is called
antithetical parallelism. Thus :
DJ51 p*W b& yiW *3
" For a righteous man falleth seven times and riseth again,
But the wicked are overthrown by calamity?*
(Proverbs xxiv. 16.)
" Scornful men set a city in flame,

But wise men turn away wrath"
(Proverbs xxix. 8.)
An example of parallelism in succeeding verses is :
: PP ^ o
nBDtji wm
^ n5N KS
I shall not die, but live, and declare the works of the Lord;
The Lord hath chastened me sore, but he hath not given me over
to death!' (Psalm cxviii. 17, 18.)
189, There are certain other usages that distinguish poetry
from prose.
. ,
1. The use of words seldom or never employed in prose.
166
Examples: tPiJX mftn, for D*"TX; ft'liipath, for ^ H - ;
n?
wordy for "D^J; HHNI ft) tttt, for X13.

2. The use of special forms, such as *hv. for ^ ;
^t;H8
for
^K
for
i ; '30 f o r } .
3. The Construct form of Nouns sometimes ends in * or

'). Examples:iihtt *33 (for |3) Aw.^ss's ^ . ( G e n . - x l i x . 11);
DW â.'TCfor ft!*)) full of people (Lamentations i. I ) ; n t y ? 133
M* sow o/ Beor (Numb. xxiv. 3).
4. The Construct form is used even in front of Prepositions,
TVp?5 nn2?? joy in the harvest (Isaiah ix. 2).
5. The frequent omission of the Definite Article, the Relative Pronoun, and HNt as sign of the Accusative.
6. One of the Accusative Pronominal Suffixes is ifi for V-or
or DH; Sib to him or to them, for .y? or QH7; iDS)/?^
mallow them up, for DyS^n (Ex. xv. 12).

7. Participles end in * (especially before Prepositions).
Thus: }*&n ^]V leaving the flock (Zee. xi. 17); \%h *1DK
binding to the vine (for ÎDX) (Gen. xlix. 11).
8. The Jussive Future form is used in the ordinary Future
sense, D3^&5 D^jy ^T"!- he will guide the meek in judgment
(Psalm xxv. 9); T p T for *!pT!!-
TABLE OF REGULAR AND IRREGULAR VERBS.
140.
167;
Comparative Table of Regular and

Irregular Verbs.
Perfect;
KAL.
NIPHAL.
PIEL.
PUAL.
î7
b^P?
bftp
b&n
Vann
b&pn
b^pon
"^s?
TO?
bs2
"TSP
^5^.0
b^jn
rrbtpn
tthjn
^P5?
bosn
sânn
usn
bsîn
nbpn
tt?n
np^n
b?n
ntrftn
Di?tn
S^p/l
nb^n
T3?On
bs|on
nbntpn
ttfeajpn
nninprr
bsson
nts^-in
o&iptfn
Guttural & inv

bss
V
rbw
\ . *>
ttfelp
YS
2D
y"y
N"3
2
fy
1
?5$
s;
D
?
a" ?
N^
*"h
nb?
VJ5
nb^3
I3
^0?
bjga
naria
Dip?
s
??
nb:?3
nbtp
b&
nW
33
Q?33
nnio
nnio
bsw
aah
bss
nj
nip
DElip
NSW
nbst
?9
nbs
QNpn
^?pn
nban
N-?tt;prT,
nbii-jn
v :
HIPHIL. HOPHAL. HITHPAEL
NIPHAL.
PIEL.
PUAL.
bbp>
bttpi
bftp*;
btep^
b^p!
bfcp^
bts>po>
ihsr
bwm
nbur
trip
W-
TSi^
1222 s
TW*
br
b^
Vw
nbtth
aJapl
rrbttr
nfa^
nsp
nbtth
$T.
^3^1
bgsî
2$?!
Qpip1;
I^Tr
bsrp
ribtt^
t&a;
T3B/T
bsp
rbw*
nnio^
bss^
nt#"
npip';
^?8!
nî^
Q'iTT
nw
b^s^
nwv
Dp^
SBB1*
NSEP
S^DV
NSB^
nby.
nb?>
nbn>
KAL.
b?s^
^
P:
H?91
nb?1
WW
' T
.. T.
nip*
MS?'!
nb|^.
nb^.
WW
WT
V I
bNarv
nbn^
ttf??iT
n:rinpN.
bsKni
n#;rr:
DBipr"!
NBBJT
nbarv!
168
Imperative:
Guttural B
y'B
K"B
*"B
)"y
KAL.
NIPHAL.
PIEL
bbp
bfcpn
bfcp
"nyn
bs|n
bs?
rhwri
ttfe t#??n
do
br>sn
bb
nu^jn
zw
nipn
TZ29
nb?
PUAL.
nbt?
E>33
b5S
ntp;
DfcSp
nban
bttpn
btaprin .
bsan
nbi^n
tzten
son
b?wn
ntpin
opn
bs|on
nbnpn
3.*pn
nninprr
bss.'pn
na^nrr
aipon
nb?n
nbirin
Infinitive:
Absolute
Construct
Guttural B<
NIPHAL.
bbpD
b$i?n
^ P )' bbp
bbn/
Thy
*S
bis?
TOSS
"ray)
bs?n
rriba? rribttfa
nbtp n b ^ n
rwa
S"BJ
PIEL
KAL.
bitap
bbp
nb
bins
T
HIPHIL. HOPHAL.; HITHPAEL.
bnpfjnj
Vsh J
bs3n
nbw *
nhw i
nb^n|
nbtp j
tt?33 )
tt?2D J
bsW
bftpn
11 b&p^n
) j bfcpnn
^3?on
bwsn
nnir>'
bbsm
PUAL.
b^n
bssrin
nb^n
nbripn
73^n |
B7213
' (
aran
73-irr j
nnio
bb|
tt?330n
nninpn
b?$rn
br^n
bssnn
bins
JI
TABLE OF REGULAR AND IRREGULAR VERBS.
169
Infinitive (continued):
KAL. NIPHAL.
*B \\
TV
,{
PIE]L
2wn
2!
PTJAL, UJPHIL HOPHAL. HITHPAEL.
nWj|
aipav
Dipnj ?ip {
H2E3
risa
K** j
Dip
D-p
NiSB
H2D
n"b {
rib|
nb??
nib? niban
.N?E>n
hafirn
rârinj
cprn
nafarr
ntfypn
nftnn
Deipon
nb?n|
W89TO
nb?on
nib? on
NB
rib? 1
rfjjm
niba j
nib? J
nib?nj
Participle :
KAL.
NIPHAL
b ^ p , -bp
btpp?
PIEL.
bfcpp b&PP b^PPP
Guttural B nay, -nis
bswa, brfa
T?
mb^,nbtt>
atop, afab
v"y nnno, nnfa
N /; B bras, bDs
3"B
*"B
D-ip,
np
'*
>-iba, nba
^W?3
PUAX. HIPHIL. HOPHAL. HITHPAEL.
bH2E
T?sp "^3SP
bito: Vs?p
nbafo rrbtpp
\ :
ar>?p
BfeDB
2pp
nniop V*?sp
bssp rrarto
Dpipp
D^pp
N-spp s ^ p p
nb?E nbnB
T
nbtp?
a?|?
a*S?P
.b JK3
bswp
aarb 2#!P
nipj npipp
NSW
nb:o rrbsE
bpP
btepnp
bs?p
nbtpp
b|^9
nbn^p
afeaflp
rninpp
bsop
nafypp
Dpiptfp
?prip
nbanp
np-ia
b?sp
"..
nb^D
VOCABULARY I.
H E B R E W INTO E N G L I S H .
nS father ( 55*).
*QW to perish ( 120*).
r O S to consent ( 120b,
note),
i n s / . stone ( 42).
D r n ^ S Abraham.
33B Agag.
r q | S letter ( 5Id).
1VTS lord {the plural
D^B
is used in the sense
of the singular lord,
and its verb is in the
singular.
n ^ S mighty.
HDiyt ground ( 52).
~n^? Adar {month).
2HS to love.
bn'W tent ( 50b, 3).
i s or.
V-1S perhaps.
but, however.
l i s light {pi. DVTiN and
nrris).
ms sign {pi. ninis).

TS
It*
"ttS
ns
nSHS.
^ns
riing
*n$
IDS,
"1CW
iîns
nVs
n>S
TT^S,
r.S
HD^S
nb^B
t^S
W
75S
then ( 89b).
e a r , / . ( 54, 5).
to gird.
brother ( 55).
Ahab
one ( 64a, & 65, 4).
sister ( 55).
to hold, seize ( 120b)
^QS
after, behind
( 59, 5.)
( T ] / e m . ; D'HAH)
another,
end.
enemy ( 49c, B).
where? (62, 1.)
H?>S, how.
not ( 61, 3).
ephah.
where ?
man ( 55).
but.
surely.
* The paragraphs as indicated should always be referred to.

number (as III., V.) refers to the conjugation to be used.
A Roman
171
VOCABULARY I.
bss
-bs
bs
bs
to eat ( 120b).
unto ( 59, 4).
not ( 61, 2).
God.
these ( 19).
D^ribs God.
if.
tnjbs Elijah.
sorbs Elisha.
*)bs thousand ( 64c).
n^bs two thousand.
mother (49d, B).
DM if.
HES cubit.
maid-servant ( 53, 3).
faith.
TOWAmen ! It is true !
V., to believe.
D3S surely.
to be strong.
ins to say ( 120b).
noM Truth.
v v:
H3$ I beseech thee.
whither.
nSN
n"
D?98
P5S
33?$
to bake ( 120b, note).

baker.
face.
to restrain.
finger,/.
nyyw four.
D ^ ^ I S forty.
rns path (pi. nirns, const

rrirns).
H ^ n g healing.
mK ^ n length.
'HB, nn Hon {Pl. nin).
P^HS palace (pL may]**).
nyj-fcj hare.
Y l $ earth, land (pi. nfcnB
co^.ni^-)N)(17,3).
tPS fire,/. ( 49d? B).
nt^S woman ( 55).
"1WM. Assyria.
^
which (20, 26).
n $ , n s ( 35, 57, l ) .
J-IS, nns, o^s, its

( 18, A).
:m os, *obs i.
IS
to be angry.
to gather ( 120a).
to bind.
Esther.
nose (49d, A).
anger (49d, A).
also.
155 garment ( 50).

b b ^ ? on account of ( 60, 1).
b i a V., to divide.
bn? tin.
n p n ^ l beast, cattle ( 53, 3).
Ni2 to come ( 136).
ttfi^ to be ashamed ( 124,6)
172
tt?
"ins
n^)S
T2
713^22
H^?
iT5
roa
bs
^ b ?
Dy1??
73
n-^SS
^9?
brs
VOCABULARY I.
plunder ( 1 1 9 , 5).
choose.
trust.
understand ( 123,
124).
understanding.
capital.
house ( 55).
to weep ( 1 2 8 , 3).
not (j 6 1 , 6).
without.
besides ( 60, 2).
Balaam.
son ( 55).
for the sake of ( 60,3).
on behalf of ( 60, 4).
Baal (the idol).
lord, master (the plural
to
to
to
to
trby3
serase o / ^ e singular,
lord, #wc? i/ verfl is in
the singular).
^ y ? cattle.
~>9S to burn.
^ p ? I I I . , to cleave, to break
forth.
->l?9 oxen.
"1J21 morning.
ttfaa 111., to seek.
N"]2l to create.
nns to flee.
i T H ? covenant.
TO
TO
n^S
^5
^n?
III., to bless.
knee, / . (dual, D?5"]3).
shame ( 52).
daughter ( 55).
in the midst of ( 60, 5).
maiden.
bsa to redeem ( 1 1 0 ) .
n i s a warrior (adj., mighty).
rrvnii might.
f " n ? | lady, mistress ( 52).
great (great man).
*H? kid.
*H| I I I . , to blaspheme.
^2 nation (pi., D?i2t).
Vria lot (/>/., rriVrfei).

bâ joy.
nbaba skull (52).
H v | to reveal ; V., to exile.
to roll away.
OS also. D3 . . . D| both
. . . . and.
b p i camel ( 50b, 3).
to bestow kindness.
13 garden (plur., Q^pa or
riiaa).
^3
fn?
"Jâ
tth|
)m
stranger.
throat.
threshing-floor.
I I I . , to drive out.
Goshen.
VOCABULARY I.
HJW^ grief ( 51c, B).
p ^ to cleave.
i y j word ( 49, B).
n r p j n ' n y j chronicles.
" ^ I I I . , to speak.
0737 honey.
tt fish (pZ. D ^ ) .
*OT banner ( 50).
^ H bear.
TH David.
Tfa friend.
W ^ wax.
Tfa generation (/?/. D'n'fr
and iThiT).
^ 7 . door ( 52).
0 7 blood ( 50a, 2).
H ^ t e ar.
H Dan.
Vhrl to seek.
n ^ law.
^ i n glory.
Nin, wn, s>n '( is, A).

n;n to be ( 129).
^ H hin (liquid
measure).
"!n ("inn) mountain ( 50a,

3).
^"]n to slay.
Verbs beginning with \ in Exercises 1 to 18.

"1N*1 and he said.
TO and it came to pass.
^ 1 and he begat.
TT'H and he lived.
Ifbjl and he went.
*sf?p*i and he reigned.
r i D ^ and he died.
fey5 and he made.
bbi and he fell.
NS?.l and he went out.
HJW and he took.
*rs?n and he called.
NH*1 and he saw.
nbtp^ and he sent.
SEtpi and he heard
7Tn*5 and he gave.
To change these verbs into the
feminine, see 44, p. 38.
vnpi Vashti.
tf?n to-go ( 122, 3).

to praise.
nan, on they ( 18, A).

] p n Hamarh
n a n behold ( 57, 3).
tJDn to turn ( 109, 5).
173
nsV, nj ( 19).
nri* to flow.
c
H3J to sacrifice.
n3J sacrifice.
VOCABULARY I.
174
nrn gokl.
rteti
nn
"I?J
"ipj
nsybt
"")J
npV]
)P\
V1X
Vll
p1\
besides ( 60, 6).

olive ( 49, A).
male.
to remember.
fierce anger.
I I I . , io sing praises.
cry
old (old man, elder).
to sow.
seed.
to sprinkle.
Hrin
bnn
15*7
nn
25H
n^n
bin
V., to hide.
to pledge ( 109, 4).
companion.
feast ( 17a, e).
to celebrate a feast,
to gird ( 109, 4).
to forbear, cease
( 109, 4).
tt5"]n new.
ttfl'n month.
tt?in to be new; III.,to renew.
to^n thread.
npin wall. .
HTn
PJH
pin
Htpn
to see, behold.
strong.
to be strong.
to sin..
nmn sin.
^n liymg.( 130, note).
rrrt to live ( 130).

Hjn animal.
n^n life.
b>n,
1
Dpn
Dpn
:b ^D strength, Avealth.
soldier, valiant man.
wise (wise man).
to be wise (109, 4).
nbn milk.
window.
v H illness,
nb^bn God forbid ! far be i t !
III., to profane ; V., to
begin,
b b n slain, dead body.
to divide, to be smooth.
portion,
portion.
TTQ11 wrath.
! n to covet.
-liEQ Hamor (Ex. 36, C, 3).
î>D ass.
b^n to have compassion, to
spare (109, 4).
DJjn violence
nEfori five.
TO grace.
/TOO spear ( 53, 2).
C2n for nothing.
1?n to be gracious.
I p n loving-kindness.
~!pn deficient.
'nDn to lack ( 109, 4).
VOCABULARY I.
V5?n to be willing, desire

( 94 ; 109, 4).
rn arrow ( 49d, B).
"SO half ( 6 8 ) .
nijn, P'n statute ( 49d,C).
,
n
?1C
mn
T T
*n'n
nsno
nttfn
TT^n
nnts
nnip
bnto
npnto
T
nits
WEE
abtp
J&
]2&
*1
D
^ n sword (pi. ninnq,
const, njsntf)
destruction.
to be angry.
winter.
reproach.
to think ( 109, 4).
darkness.
executioner, guard.
slaughter.
to dip.
ring ( 52).
pure.
good.
to be unclean.
unclean.
to hide.
to load.
children.
before ( 89b).
"HM} river {especially the

Nile).
bw; y . , to consent.
>D-in> Jebusite.
bn^T V., to bring.
if?*
175
ttfoj to be dry.
m) Jabesh Gi.lead.
."TJ ( / . ) h a n d ( 50a, 4).
^ 7 T to acknowledge, V., to
praise, VII., to confess
( 135, 1).
3HJ to know ( 131).
rrnrp judah.
^Tin> Jew.
7/nnirr^ Jonathan.
Q i v d a y ( 50a, 5) (OVD,
standing
by itself,
mea?is to-day).
njV dove.
~^V creator.
I ^ n . together, as one.
n ^ T to be good (121).
\)1 wine. .
HP!) I!., to argue together;
V., rebuke, prove.
b b j to be able ( 122, 6).
to bear.
0} sea ( 49d, A).
r ? J right hand.
ni^ : ê ni> ( 50a, 5).

*)} to continue ( 122, 7).
">DJ H I . , to punish.
IV) to appoint, V., testify.
V&J Jael.
IP! because.
VVT to advise.
npsn Jacob.
VOCABU LARY I.
176
IP!
HDJ
?:
S;
a?;
pre;
*"^?1
PS;
1;
m:
*"lf^
KTT
forest.
beautiful.
to go out ( 133, 1).
to place, to stand ( 122,
5).
to place ( 122, 8).
Isaac.
creature.
to pour out ( 122, 5).
to form.
to kindle ( 122, 5).
precious.
to be afraid ( 133, 2 ;
134).
02?"}; Jeroboam.
TV to go down.
T7.1- Jordan ( = t h e descending river).
n n ; to shoot, to teach ( 135,
2).
P"1T green.
p i ; to spit.
a n ; to inherit, V., to drive
o u t ( 122, 4).
W1. there is ( 57, 2).
naJ; to sit, dwell ( 121).
7 # ; to sleep ( 122, 4).
2tp; to save, help.
")tp; upright.
b ^ l P ; Israel.
iBfbS when.
*Q2 to be heavy ; III., to

honour ( 94, 1).
D?3 to wash.
J&9J, H ^ 5 ? lamb.
H3 thus.
703 priest (/>/. D^rfS).
1*13 I I I . , to act as priest.
0 3 , ^nb strength.
nyiS star.
^3 for, because, when, that.
Efc* ^3 but, except.
1
*?3 all ( 68).
3^3 dog.
rfpS to be ended; III., to
finish.
n b s destruction.
daughter-in-law, bride.
^ 5 vessel ( 55).
HS3 how many ?
75^ 73 thus, so.
^155 wing, corner ( 52, 2).
7^55 Canaan.
SD3 throne, seat.
n p 3 I I [., to cover.
HADS covering, robe.
?1?5 silver.
D23 to be angry.
*13 hand or foot (hollow of
the); spoon ( 54, 6).
T D ? young lion.
"123 III., to atone.
DH3 vineyard.
VOCABULARY I.
b p n 3 (Mount) Carmel.
3 ^ 3 to bend the knee.
rns to cut; with rrn?i, to

btt?3
D"#3
HH3
njh?
~>^3
make (a covenant) ;
see footnote to p. 90.
to stumble {the Future
Niphal is used in
Kal sense).
Chaldeans.
lo write.
coat ( 53, 3).
to crown, surround.
s b , vab ( ^ 3 b ) m., heart (/?/.,
ni3b and ninn1?).
^ b alone ( 62).
B*nb robe.
^bnb so as not to ( 61).
EH1? to put on (clothes).
W^b, ^b O would that !
mb, ., tablet (/?/. nirab).

^L? Levite, Levi.
Erf? II., to fight ( 94, 2).
nb^b night; nb^bn this night
to stay over night.
if? to capture,
therefore.
to learn ; I I I . and V.,
to teach.
HEib why ?
in order that, for the
sake of ( 60, 7).
177
wormwood.
before ( 6 0 , 8).
to take ( 117, 5).
to glean, gather.
to meet ( 62, 4).
tongue, language.
rOt^b chamber.
v?pb
nph
ftpb
n^npb
*7S very ("T'tfO ^ P very

exceedingly).
HWp hundred.
711SWQ anything ( 68).
V.^2 whence.
D^riND two hundred.
"in^lp choice, best,
scroll.
p shield ( 50, 3).
" ' T H P wilderness.
"Hp to measure.
S-TTO why ?
^TO whenever, as often as.
HJ'Hp country, province.
HE w h a t ?
nnD, r n n j p speedily.
rilVlE kindred.
HD^ft instruction, chastisement.
HID death ( 49a, e.).
rWD to die ( 124, 4).
n 3 t p altar ( 50b, 2).
njCip camp.
nntjjqn thought.
178
ntp
ntjD
""ittTP
HSP
"DE
sbp
TJSy
rDsSp
ttfaa1?^
Tf^7
TfyE
nsi3V
D^riifpp
nribpp
ilyttJSpE
IP
nn?p
Tlttnp
"iSpE
VOCABULARY I.
rod, tribe.
rain.
uprightness.
wounding, wound.
to sell.
to be full.
messenger, angel.
work ( 53, 3).
garment.
king.
to reign,
queen.
kingdom ( 53, 2).
tongs.
kingdom.
dominion.
from ( 25).
meal-offering, gift.
Manasseh.
prison.
Dpp to melt.
"iQpp number.
upwards.
V ? ? deed.
ntT'S^ work.
nfrs? tithe.
S^tt
rQgfc
iTlÊ
nB??
Dn?9
EHpE?
to find.
pillar.
commandment.
Mizpah.
Egypt.
sanctuary.
nipp place (/?/. niDhps).

SnD Mara (i.e., bitter).
n^~)p appearance.
"HE to rebel.
"1*1^ to be bitter.
nttto Moses.
n^tpD anointed one ( 50b, 2).
n^3tt?e image ( 53. 2).
n ~ p ^ f t reward, hire ( 52).
bttJB parable, proverb.
lEtTO, n n ^ t p p charge ( 52).
n ^ D staff.
nnQIpfc family ( 52).
toQ^JD judgment.
n p p p butler.
ttfffite) to feel.
n ? dead man.
p i n p sweet.
D\np few men.
NJ I beseech thee.
CS? saith ; lit., noun, the
utterance of.
7pg3 faithful.
W?3 to prophesy ( 132, 1).
^3? V., to look.
H*0? prophet.
^M opposite ( 6 ).
T3? V., to tell. ,
*TS?5 prince, leader.
n | 3 frequently goring.
M to touch ( 131, 2).
179
VOCABULARY I.
^35 to plague.
3J to draw near ( 116).
^ 1 5 noble.
^73 to vow.
*n*J3 vow.
-inj river (pi. n i i n ? ) .
HI 3 dwelling,
n m to lead.
inheritance.
r^
DTO III., to comfort ( 111,
t^n? H I . , to divine.
ritttfl? copper.
Htpa to incline ( 133, 1).
ttftOJ to leave behind, neglect.
n y r ? Nineveh.
H?3 V., to smite ( 132,2).
T[p3 drink-offering.
^D2 to journey.
E*1?? pleasant.
C^2 pleasantness.
^P^3 Naomi.
~l^5 young man.
rHp3 maiden.
n22 to blow.
b s j to fall ( 117, 3).
HSvp5 wonder.
ttfM soul.
bS3 Y., to deliver.
n,"J3 to be innocent ( 133,4).
^P3 innocent.
^3 light (pi. ni-13).
.Ntp? to bear ( 132,2).
N
2OT
NÊJJ
""^3
in?
to blow.
prince.
eagle.
to give ( 117,4).
23?
^np
TJ^D
DÎD
"^D
limp
H2D
nbp
nbp
to surround ( 118).
around ( 59).
to anoint.
horse.
to depart, turn.
Sihon.
tabernacle.
Selah!
to forgive.
to raise a mourd.
fine flour.
to support.
blindness.
to mourn.
ship.
I. to count ; I I I . to
relate.
book.
to stone.
to hide, V.
secret.
jlbD
TJ^D
B'HJ??
1p
n?^pp
"l?P
-)Sp
b|?p
nnp
~>rip
"O^
13^
*"Q?
"H33?
n|3J
to serve.
servant.
to pass over.
indignation.
cake.
180
VOCABULARY I.
~rp until OH IV exceedingly).

*T$ witness.
H"TV congregation.
n^HP testimony, law.
TO yet, still ( 57, 4).
V)2 yoke.
iniquity.
DVTO eternity ( 49c, A),
"py iniquity.
7i?i^ enchanter.
W2V9 punishment.
W to fly.
^V bird.
TO skin.
Tp goat ( 49J, B).
^ t y to forsake.
TO to help.
W eye ( 54, 4).
^
( / ) city ( 50, 7)
rhv to go up.
riES opposite ( 60, 10).

Hjy to answer ; I I I . , to
afflict ( 128,3).
\2 cloud.
"IS? dust.
VP tree, stick ( 50a, 6).
n^35 idols.
Tl'SV counsel.
D ^ y strong (strong man).
Q?P bone (/.) (pi. n t o ? S ;
COM**. n t o ? y ) .
^j?.P because.
?p_P to arrange, to set in
battle array.
nbV to make ( 128, 3).
7inbV: ten.
^n'WV tenth-part ( 68).
\ntttp ( 64a).
nv time ( 49a, B).
n.FI37 now.
V-ip suitable.
burnt-offering.
nVb? deed.
\?1? to rejoice.
Ep with.
DP people ( 49d, A, and
17a, e).
TOp to stand.
T3? pillar.
P*?S Amalek.
"Ofep Ammonite.
*P valley.
H5
HQ
YÊ
ir\B
bbs
^ b ?
IB
n25
E*OQ
here.
mouth ( 55).
to scatter.
to fear.
V I I . , to pray.
Philistine.
lest ( 61, 4).
to turn ( 128, 3).
face (tfAe singular form
does not exist, 60, 8).
VOCABULARY I.
nos
nps
to pass over.
paschal offering, the
Passover.
graven-image.
^9?
\>VB to work, to do.
UVB time, Q???S9 twice (=
two times).
DVB to move.
- T
TB9 to visit, to num ber ;
II., to be missing ;
V., to appoint.
n^P? numberings.
TpQ officer.
1 3 (15)71, 17a, e) bullock.
n
l ? eowr.
nns to be fruitful
n | fruit.
^n? rigour.
D-15 Persia.
T T
rrins Pharaoh.
-ns V., to frustrate, to
annul.
ansa to spread out.
^ ^ -QT transgression.
c'sns suddenly.
nns to be deceived ; V , to
enlarge.
njriQ to open; III., to unloose.
n t i s door.
sng suddenly.
-
]HS sheep.
>?
IS
p-JS
plS
npl!
p^lS
HJS
J'V?
JlftS
)*
]5?
rnbV
3b,7?
nnS
V^p
I^rj
-157.
lip
ttfllp
Dip
Dip
rPTHp
EHp
E?7P
Vlp
Kp
^ p
181
glory.
( ^ ? ) side.
righteousness.
to be righteous.
righteousness.
righteous (man).
I I I . , to command.
Zion.
to prosper.
to grow, spring forth.
north.
to hide.
Zipporah,
Ziklag.
trouble.
I. and III., to gather.
to bury.
grave ( 50).
to bend (the head), to
bow.
holy (holy man, saint).
east.
to come before.
blackness.
to be holy.
holiness, sanctuary
( 49a, D.)
slayer.
voice (pi. n'lbip).
to arise ( 123).
to slay.
182
VOCABULARY.
)bi7 (/. naai7) small.

-1^1? I I I . , V., to offer incense.
vn
Cain.
wall (pi. ni-r^p).
^P
n
?p
n
?n T
n
?P
height.
to buy.
reed.
v:. end.
* ] ^ to be angry.
n s p end ( 53, 3).
N^rj_to call.
=npT to be near.
midst ( 62, 2).
^?T V., to attend, hearken.
*I^PT to bind.
nt
?r?. bow ( 53, 3).
^m
run to see.
T T
aW-i head ( 50a, 8).

littfK-l first ( 66).
m (/. n;p_) gr eat.
n
rri greatness, multitude.

? ? l ten thousand.
"?T to increase ( 128, 5).
fourth.
^TI
o^nsn twenty thousand.
Vv
(/.) foot ( 54, 3).
*rrn
m
on
?n
V-n
to pursue.
(/.)wind,spirit(50b,2)
to be high.
to be evil
to run.
sm
^rn
am
D^m
VCH
Pn
Ml
Mi
T
"
ci
fepi
in
?'"">
width.
Rachel.
to have mercy.
mercy.
to wash.
vanity.
to ride.
Rechab.
high.
creeping-thing.
( / . n ^ n ) evil, bad.
evil, wickedness.
^V") famine.
V7 evil.
to be evil.
T
Nyi to heal.
nsn to murder.
P7 empty.
vw~l wicked.
TOBh. wickedness.
n
b^stp Saul.
I H # Sheoi (abode of the
dead).
bsitj? to ask.
rmjgtf; remnant.
^ 2 $ tribe, rod.
ub^)
nbiatf ear of corn (pi.
shibboleth.
25a? II., to swear ( 94, 2, 3).
nv^w seven.
^ZW to break.
VOCABULARY I.
r n t P to rest, to cease ( footnote to p. 90).
nZW Sabbath.
^W Almighty.
I2W to return (ivhen joined
to another ve?b, see
122, 7).
&9ittf judge,
"litt? ox ( 50a, 9).
Jttfatf Shushan.
HPTE? to bow down ( 128, 7).
toHtp to slay, slaughter.
~inK7 morning.
nnttf V., to destroy.
U>&W Shittim (acacia).
nâJ, rrr<g7 song.

I23t? to lie down.
rDtp to forget,
D ^ Shechem.
WDW V., to rise up early.
ptt? to dwell.
fpttf neighbour.
Eibtt? peace.
rf?tt? to send ; III., to Let go.
Tjbtt? Y., to cast.
y ? $ spoil.
u?W to be at peace, to be
perfect ; H I . , to pay.
perfect.
nfebtp Solomon.
F^ttf to draw (a sword).
nwbtp three.
183
Ditt?1??? (usuallyjoined
to^ft^)
heretofore (/^., the
third day).
DB? name ( 50a, 10).
D ^ there.
Itttp V., to destroy.
HEttf thither,
oarnue'.
H ^ f t p tidings, report.
n^W heaven ( 50b, 3).
Qtttt? to be desolate.
Tlpp eight.
VT^W to hear.
^Kp to keep.
aJfittJ sun.
W
HJtt?
njfitf
ta?3??
n^B?
^
- W
tSDtt?
TJSIJ7
tooth.
year ( 52).
sleep ( 51c, C).
two.
VII., to be dismayed.
II., to lean.
gate.
to judge.
to pour out.
nija; v. o/nnttf ( 128,6).

bft#
^1?$
^5"]??
"HtP
rntP
Httttp
nntj?
shekel.
falsehood.
sceptre.
to be an enemy.
to minister, to serve.
six.
to drink ( 128, 6).
184
D)m
VOCABULARY I.
"1W to search out.
two (/.) ( 64a.)
rnin law.
SOttf
yzip
rrjtp
D^ttf
TOE?
nb^tp
T?{p
n^Vip
nStt?
ptP
nb
plenty.
to be full, to be satiated,
field ( 49b, D).
to place.
to rejoice.
raiment.
Seir.
he-goat.
lip ( 54, 7).
sackcloth.
prince ( 50a, 11).
TTlty Sarah.
?ntp seraph.
*DP to burn.
nD~]tp burning.
rTODJp understanding.
n"jin thanksgiving,
tjin ( t j i n
co?*^.)
( 60, 5).
nyîn worm.
midst
n n r i under, instead of ( 59,
ttrhrn wine.
&*!& he-goat.
HyPl to hang.
7>iftJ?l yesterday
(usually
joined to OtPytt?, which
see).
"T^ft-FI continually.
D^ft-FI perfect, without blemish.
Tf^ri to lay, to support.
EPfJl to end.
n M ^ p cause of estrangement.
n ^ = ? n glory.
/lyD^ prayer.
^ S n to lay hold of.
n n n j - l offering.
nV-T")^ shouting, sounding the
cornet.
nVUpn nine.
VOCABULARY II.
ENGLISH
INTO
Aaron, *PL}&
Abishag, 3 ^ 3 8
able, t o b e , b b j ( 122, 6).
abomination, rQ3?\n
about (with numerals) ( 65, 10).
Abraham, E r n 3 S
according to, ? ( 24).
acknowledge, to, r\l) ( 135, 1).
Adonijah, ri^ltt
after, n n , ^ . q S ( 5 9 , 5 ) .
afterwards, TOnrjsa
age, old, Q^pT
age ( 65, 8).
all, b b ( 68, 2).
also, 03
altar, TOTS ( 50b, 3).
Amorite, "HE$
and, 1 ( 31).
anger, *]*?, fVltf
anger, to provoke to, 0?5 V.
answer, to, H3V
HEBREW.*
any more, T137

arise, to, O^p
army, v^P
around, ^ 3 ? ( 5 9 , 6 ) .
arrow, VD ( 49J, H).
as, ? ( 24), ^ 2
Asa, ND
ashamed, to be, 8^22 ( 124, 6).
ask, to, bsttf
ass, n t a q
astonished, to be, EP*?
attend, to, ^ p , Y.
avenger, 'fc$2
Baal, b ? 3
Babylon, b ^ 2
bag, ^ 5 ( 55).
Balaam, D y b ?
Balak, pb?
band, rrcnD, b3?
basin. HO
* The Pronouns and Numerals are omitted from this Vocabulary. A

Roman number (as III., V.) refers to the conjugation to be used. Thus "
DJJ3 V. indicates that the Hiphil, not the Kal, is to be used to mean to
provoke to anger.
IcSfi
VOCABULARY II.
battle, rron1?*?
bear, to, fc?
bear (children), to, \7\
because, ?Vbefore {adv. of time), H$ ( 89b)
before (adv. of place), N5.5?
( 60, 8).
behold, nan ( 57, 3).

behold, to, EDJ, V.
Benjamin, "pp^St
best, better (see 34).
Bethel, b s - n ^
between, T 5 ( 58, 1).
bring near, to, mp T , V., ^

bunch, n73
burn, to, *nj
burn incense, to, ^^pr, V.
burnt-offering, ny3)
bury, to, "Oft
but, TJW ; = and ( 31).
butler, nfttTO
V.
by (by means of), 5 ; (at side

of),
Cake, nar
break, to, ""OH?

break in pieces, to, "O^p, I I I .
breath, npttfc
call, to, bnj?

camel, ^ 9 ? ( 50b, 3).
camp, njriE}
can (to be able),bbj ( 122, 6).
candlestick, rT}375
cast, to, Tyb^, Y.
cattle, n ^ n ^ l ( 53, 3).
certainly, use Inf. Abs. ( 92, B).
chastisement, HDÊ
child, 1 ^ .
cease, to, HZW (see footnote to
p. 90).
certainly, see surely,
chief, ^W
city, ^
(f.) ( 50a, 7).
clap, to, P50
close, to, "iSy
bridle, nion^
cloud, ft?
bring, to, NiSl, V. ( 136, 1).

bring low, to, b?U7, Y.
come, to, W^ ( 136, 1).

comfort, to, DTO ( 111, 2).
big, Vh?
bind, to, itfiJ
bless, to, ^ , I I I .
blessing, nDH?
blood, CH ( 50a, 2).
body, dead, v b n
book, H^p ( 49a, B).
bottle, b^3
bow, n#j? ( 53, 3).
bow, to, 1*TfJ
bow down, to, nnitf ( 128, 7).

bread,
breadth, arn, tern
187
VOCABULARY II.
command, to, i"^?, I I I .

commandment, ^ 1 ? P
companion, 15??
company,
conceal, to, Qb^, HD3, I I I .
confess, to, H T , V I I . ( 135, 1).
congregation, <"H^> '"î?
consecrate, to, D^T T ^bp, I I I .
consume, to, b ? S ( 120, 120b).
continue, to, îQ) ( 122,7).
counsel, n^J5
court, ~ ^ n
covenant, fVlSl
create, to, fcOS
creator, N*Tl2l
creditor, Hgfa
cry, to, PS?
cubit, n^W
curse, to,
cut off, to, r n ^ (see footnote
p. 90).
to
Delilah, n V b ^
deliver, to, b ? J , V.
depart, to, ^ O
desolate, to be, QE7
destroy, to, ! & V. ; nn\$ V.
die, to, r&& ( 124, 4).
dip, to, bnts
dirge, H ^ p
distant, p^rTT
divide, to, V } ? , V . ; p b n
do, to, HTO ( 128, 3).
do well, to, n^ T , V. ( 121).
door-post, HptJp
down, to go, T]^
draw near, to, t^33, ^Pp
dream,
dream, to,
drink, to, n n ^ ( 128,6).
drink, strong, ^ 5 ^
drive, to, tth?, H I .
dust, nay
dwell, to, p t ? , ^
Dan, H
daughter, H 5 (
daughter-in-law,
David, TT=T
day, CV ( 50a,
day, to-, OVn
dead, dead man,
dear, î"pT
declare, to, H9p,
deed, Tlipyp
55).
H^S
6).
ntt
III.
Each (see 55a, 1, and 65, 10).

eagle, *"it3.
ear 1! (/) ( 54, 5).
ear-rings, DJ3.
early, to rise up, Eptp, V.
earth, H 9 ( / ) ( ' 1 7 a , c).
eat, to,bDW( 120, 120b).
Egypt, DT1?9
.
elder, 7jft ( 49b, C).
"1
"vmn
1
J 88
1
1
eldest, Vnjl (Vn? followed % D

o/* comparison, as m Ex,
VOCABULARY 11.
28, C, 5).
1
1
I
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Elijah, ^ b s
emit smoke, to, )WV
enemy, n>W ( 49c, B).
enrich, to, n # y V.
entreat, to, 573?
Ephraim, E?n?#
Esau, * J
escape, to,
evening, ^11?
ever, for.
every, Vs ( 6 8 , 2 ; .
everyone who, v3 (folloived by
^ c participle ivith/ n prefixed).
evil, 3n (q/Uer nttfy W5e S^PT,
1
I
1
1
1
I
1
particularly
when idolatry
is meant).
except, Dtf""*?
executioner, Hllto
exile, to, nba, y .
expect, to, Vbs, in.
expectation, rnp-Fl
eye, ]V? f/.) (54, 4).
1
1
1
I
Face, 0^3? (rco singular

omte ( 60, 8).
faithful, 19g0
fall, to, b95
falsehood, TJttf
form
1*|1
family, n T O ^ p ( 5 2 ) .
famine, 2VH
father, SH ( 55).
fear, H N ^
fear, to, N ^ ( 132, 2, 3).
festival, an, IV'^72
fetch, to, n p b
few, topp
few in number, ^ ? 0 ? ÔP
field, rtltp
fierceness, lV">n
fig, n j s ^
fight, to, n n S , I L ( 9 4 , 2 ) .
fill, to, s b p , i n .
find, to, N?p
fire, m ( / . ) .
fish, ^ T
flee, to, D?)3
flesh, ^ ?
flint, ti?>Qbn
flood, b ^ p
1
1
1
J
I
flourish, to, n!S, m ?

folly, nb-js
food, b ? S
fool, V p ?
foot, bpv (/.) ( 54, 3).
for, / prep., ^? conj.
1
I
I
I
1
1
ford, nnn^p (/?z. r r m v p )
forehead, H^ft
forget, to, rpttf
forsake, to, 2?^
fourth part, r p ^ y ?
1
1
1
1
1
j
1
I
1
1
I
1
1
1
J
1
1
VOCABULARY II.
friend, T t t , nyn
from, IP ( 25).
fruit, ^
fruitful, to be, mTB
frustrate, to, "H? V.
fulfil, to, !?, I I I . ( 126, 1).
full, to the, VZUh
Garment, 11$ ( 50, 1), ^ n b
gate, nOQ, "158?
gather, to, top*?, ^DpT, 0 7 ^ , I I I .
Gaza, n-J?
great, to be,
great, to make, v l ^ H I . or V.
greatness,
ground, n p i B ( 52, II.), V"3
Hagar, l^*?
half, ^ n ( 68).
hand, T ( / . ) ( 5 1 , 1 , and 50a,
give, to, 10? ( 117,4).

give thanks, to, H T ( 135, 1).
glad, to be, nfr, few
gladness, n n p t p
glory, T D 3
4).
Hannah, Han
head, ttWl (m.) ( 50a, 8).
hear, hearken, to, ^7
heart, s b , n n b ( w .)
heavens, DÊttf ( 50b, 3).
heavy, *T33
Hebrew, n r i y
Hebron, p ? r j
height, HDp
go, to, tf?'7( 122,3).
help, to, nty, EHP, v.
go down, to, T}J
here, H3
heretofore, Dfefjtt; bitttf
girl, rn53, nb1??
go, to let, rbw in.

go out, to, ? J ( 133, t).
go up, to, nb?7( 131).
God, ovrb$,b
gold, nnt
good (good man), nitfi
good, to be, n&J ( 121).
good, to do, 2&) V.
grace, ID
gracious, I ^ D
grave, "Oft ( 50> *)
great (great man), V n a
189
hide, to, nrip, oby

high place, HJD^l
hire,
^
hire, to, "15&>
hiss, to, p'Htt?
hold, to, TD
holiness, EH-P
holy (holy man), E^np
hope, HJpri
horse, D^D
host, ? ? (pi. nibCl?).
190
VOCABULARY II.
house, iT2l ( 55).

how, HE
husband, b ^ 5
hyssop, ^'iTfc?
judge, to, T2DE7, 1 ^

judge, tS9htt?
Keep, to, n*
kill, to, nn, rvt&, v., btsp,

Idol, b>b$, a s ?
if, DW
in, 3 ( 24).
incense, to burn, *")&[? I I I .
increase, rP2n.Fl
indignation, P ^ H
inherit, to, tthj
inheritance,
iniquity, P ^
instrument, ^2> ( 55).
interest, Tftt?3
interpret, to, "l^Q
iron,
Isaac, PH^.
Ishmaelite,
Israel, V n t p .
Jacob, np3
Jehu, NJin?.
Jericho, s irrn>
Jeroboam, Oy^Tp.
Jerusalem,
Jordan, 1?"!'!
Joseph, HPV
Joshua,
VW^
3y3 nnptp
kindness, *"Jpn
kindled, to be, r n n ( 128, 3).
kindred, fTTÊ
king, Tj!?9
kingdom,
kiss, to, P^J
know, to, STJ ( 131).
knowledge, ny^T
Lack, to, ^ p n ( 109, 4).
lad, n^3. ( 49, C)
Lamech, Tfftb
land, n < ? ( A
law, nn'in
lay hold, to, THS
lead, to, an; ( 117,6); tybn, v.

learn, to,
leave, to, n*y, tt?3
left, to be, ntt7, I I .
lest, 15
let go, to, nbttf, I I I .
letter, 3 $ ? , r n | M (. 5Id).
Levite, ^
lie down, to, ZL3W
life, D ^ n
lift up, to, en, y. ; sba

light, TIM (p/. Dn'lM or /THIN).
VOCABULARY II.
like, 3 ( 24).
lintel, *lip*?
lip, n s t p ( 54, 7).
little, a, &V9
little ones, *lr
live, to, r\>n ( 130).
lodge, to, f v
loose, to, 3H5
Lord, the, 'n (== nirp)

lord, i n s , p . p
tines).
(of the Philis-
lot, Vria
Lot, toib
loud, b i i |
love, to, ^ n s
loving-kindness, ^ ? D
low, to be
low, to bring,
Maiden, HDbp, nb^rm

maid-servant, HEN ( 53, 3).
make, to, nttfE
make, to (a covenant), ri.13
male, "ipt
man, tt^M ( 55).
man servant, *T5^
mantle, n ^ N , r t o b
many, m . (/. n ? n , ;>/. C^51)
marvellous works, niN>?a (ii.

-Participle of wba).
meet, to, ^2?
11)1
meet, to ( = towards), nNHpb

( 62, J),
melt, to, DDE
mention, to, ~1?t , V.
Merab, m a
mercj, DÊprn
messenger,
Micah, H p ^
Midian, r T 7?
midst, Tfin ( 60, 5) ;
^(7
C 62, 2).
might, rnsojt, nb
mighty (mighty man), ^1225
minister, to, f"nttf, I I I .
month, t^^rr
morning, *1jJ3
Moses, H^ft
Most High, l i ^ 7
mother, DM, ^ (^/. nfetf).
mountain, "in ( 50a, 3).
mourning,
mouth, Hg (p. 55).
multiply, to, Tiyi ( 128, 5).
murderer, n!Y")
Nabal, b?5
name, DB? ( 50a, 10).
nation, ^3 (p/. D?i2).
nay, frO
Nebat, tt?3
neighbour, ] ? ^
new, trnn
192
VOCABULARY II.
night, n b f ?
Nisan, 1^3
no, not, -bN, s b , ^ ( 61, B).
noble, ^ 1 3
north, ^ 3 ?
nothing, r ( 61, B).
now, nrip
now ( = I pray thee), WD
number, ~)?PP
numbering, E^TlpG
Oath, n y ^ 7
observe, to, '"lfttP
office, m ^ p ( 52).
officer, TpQ
oil, )W
old, 1PT
old age, nyfi? ( E x . 21, C, 5).
only, P I
open, to, nriQ
other, ^CI
other, one to the, ^ n i r r b a t^tf
overthrow, to, tJDn ( 109, 5).
ox, i W ( 50a, 9).
Palace, ito^H (pz. n i a ^ ) ,

byn
palm
(tree), ^9*?; (of

n ? ( 54, 6).
pass, to, ~ 0
hand)
path, m'M (p/. nimw; C o ^ .

nirns), nyris
pay to, DbtJ7, I I I .

peace,
people, D? ( 49d, A).
perish, to, "QH ( 120, B).
Pharaoh, H^nQ
Philistine, *vnpb5
physician, N$V")
pieces, to break in, *Otp, I I I .
pit, n i s ( 42).
place, D'lpB ( 42).
place, high, nft!2
plain, "13?
plant, to, ^toj
play, to, pntJ7, I I I .
pleasing, to ba, 2&T ( 121).
plenty, S;tto
plunder, to, tt?
poor, to be, EH J
pot, T D
pour out, to, TfD^?
power, H3
praise, to, ^ b n ? I I I .
praises, to sing, ÊT, I I I .
pray, to, bb>Q, V I I .
pray thee (you), I, NJ
prater, nb?F1
precious, *">i^
presence, se face.
priest, i n b , pZ. D^rj3
prince, nfe ( 50a, 11).
profane, to, bbn,
in.
prophet, K*05
VOCABULARY II.
proverb, 'V?^
provoke to anger, to, D 2 3 , V.
pure, -lintp
pursue, to, *1TJ
put forth, to, nbtt?
Quake, to, 1^3
queen, nf?v (
51).
Rebecca, î??*!
rebuke, to, n ? J , V.
rebuke, nnriin
recognise, to, n*P ( 135, 1),
>??, v .
redeem, to, ^ S |
redeemer,
redemption, ^Y^5
rejoice, to, HEtt?, WW.
relate, to, "I9P, I I I . ; ^5?, V.
remember, to, " D |
remove, to, ~^D? V.
reproach, *"J?"]0
reprove, to, HD;, V.
rest, to, nntt;, rra ( 131).

of vni).
ride, to, ^5*1
righteous, P^T^
righteousness, î77?
rise, to, Q^p
rise up early, to, Epttf, V.
robe, ttJ-m1?, ^33, n b p t p
rod, tflgl, H ^ p
roll away, to, T?J
Ruth, n n
Rachel, b m
rain, to, ~^D
rain, ^ 9 , Dttfc '
raise on high, to, E^D, I I I .
return, to, 2 W
revered, N"pD (Niphal
193
Participle
Sabbath, natt?
sacrifice, n?T
sacrifice, to, r Q *
saddle, to, ^ ? n
sake of, for the, JSB1? ( 60, 7)#
salvation, H ^ ^
Samaria,
)^W
Samson, p a ^ t f
sanctify, to, EHR, I I I . or V.
sanctuary, ttn|?D
Saul, ^Mtf
save, to, rttf;, V.
say, to, ^ ( 120).
scales, D^T^ft
scatter, to, V ^ , V.
scroll,
sea, DJ
see, to, TllpT ( 134).
seed, 3 n t
seek, to, ttfaa , I I I .
Seir,
^W
seize, to, THS ( 120), folloioed
by 22 in front of the objective.
194
VOCABULARY II.
sell, to, ^?
smite,
send, to, nbtt?

send forth, to (a hand),
(a person, tire), nbtp, I I I .
separate, to,
servant, 122
serve, to, * P ^
service, '"H-*-^
set, to, D *
shadow, bjf, ^ S
shame, ngfca ( 52).
shame, to put to, ttn2 ( 124,6).
she-ass, ^ , />/. n ^ i n w
2).
smoke, J???
snow,
son, ] 5 ( 55).
shed, to, TTSa;

sheep, 1 ^
shekel, b p p
shepherd. HJH
Shibboleth, nbatt?
shore, HEtt?
show, to, n*n, v. ( 134).

Sibboieth, nbap
silent, to be, Oft^
silver, HO?
sin, to, N^H
sin, ns^n
sing, to, "l^tp
sing praises, to, *TOt ? I I I .
sink, to, SOft
slave, T^?
slay, to, ^ . H , bttpT, r m ,
sling, to, EbjJ, H I .
small, ] b p , (/.) n?tp[7
V.
to,
rD3,
V.
( 133,
soog, - w , rrya?
sorrow, r n ^
soul, ttJsa (/.), jo/. nwzi

sow, to, 3Ht
speak, to, " n ^ , I I I .

speedily, *"Hnp
spirit, 0-11 ( / ) ( 50b, 2).
spoil, bbttJ
spy out, to b?n, i n .
stand, to, "T^
standing-image, H^??^
statue, p h ( 49d, C).
stead, n n n ( 59', 9).
steal, to, ^5?
stick, V? ( 50a, b).
stone, to, bpD n?n
stone, W ? (/.),/>/. E^?S :
store, Pî??
strange, "it
stranger, ^15?, ~>t
stretch forth, to, nbttf
stroke, HStt
strong, p t n
strong drink, *">5^
stumble, to, btt?3, I I .
suckle, to, P3?,.V..( 121).
support, to, T[ftD
VOCABULARY II.
surely, ]5M (or, infinitive Absol.,
followed by finite Verb;
92, B).
surround, to, ^ 5
swear, to, V2$, I I . ( 94, 2).
swift, bp,/. nbp
sword, ^n.o,y.
Syria, Dntf:
Tablet, rnb,;?/., nirab

tail, n?r
take, to, n p b ( 117, 5).
tall, t n
. teach, to, ^ b , H I . and V., rTV;,
V. ( 135, 2).
teaching, PH1PI
tell, to, 13?, V . ; ^2D, I I L
thanks, to give, H T , ( 135, 1).
theft, nns?
then, TS ( 89b).
thence, Eti?E
there, EE7
there is, &. ( 57, 2).
thereof = his or her.
therefore, 7^7
thing, " n i (anything, rTON).
think, to, ^ H
thought, nnirnn
throne, ND3
throw, to, Tjb^, V.
time, tVS ; (wi/A numbers) El?5,
195
to and fro, to walk (see walk),

to-day, DVH
tongue, p ^ b (/.).
touch, to, ^3? ( 131).
towards,
(a/so expressed by n
Local), ( 56, B).
tread, to, Tf*l':T
tree, V? ( 50a, 6).
tribe, &?(P
trouble, PHE
trust, to, ntS2
truth, n p ^
turn, to, "ttD
Unto, -by ( 59, 4).

upon, - b ^ ( 59, 8).
upright, "Itt^
upwards, n b ^ E
Valiant ( = for a son of valoui),
b>n 73b
vengeance, ^?i7*3
venison, *T??
very, IMX?
vessel,
vine, 1 5 |
vineyard, E^.3
voice, bip, ^/. nibip
vow, to, "H?
vow, "H3
VOCABULARY II.
196
Walk to and fro, to ( 122, 3).

wall, Httin
water, D"!5 ( 55).
wave,
way, T H
weep, to, H ? ? ( 128,3).
weigh, to, ^ P $
welfare, &hw
well, to do, ^ , V. ( 121).
when, ~1$^5; or, 21 or 2 with
verb in Inf. Const. ( 92, B)
whence, D # S
^
( 26).
where ? H?.W
where, Up
~>#8 ( 26).
whom (see 26).
why, n ^ b ^ ^ D
wicked, Stth
widow, n j t t y ^
wife, nt^W ( 55).
wilderness, ^?*1P
window, libn, n a n a
wine, T)l
wing, fl33 ( 54, 2).
wisdom, Httpn
wise, to be, D ? n ( l 0 9 , 4 ) .
wise (wise man), E^ 1 ?
with, D? ( 58, 2), -HM ( 57,
1, C).
withhold, to, S3
without, *?* ; V=in (p. 163, 4).
witness, ^V.
woman, n $ S ( 55).
word, ^ ^ I
work, ntp??n
works, marvellous {see marvellous).
worker, ^ B
worship, to, n W V I I . ( 128,
7).
would that! 1 8 V S (Foofewte *>
117, 4).
wrath, nnn
write, to, 2 0 ?
Year, n?t, ( 52).
Zarephath, HS"!?
Zion, li?
WEHTHEIMER, LEA AND CO., PRINTERS, CLIFTON HOUSE, WORSHIP STREET, E.C.

Adler Hebrew001st

Încărcat de

Informații document

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Adler Hebrew001st

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

STUDENT'S

MICHAEL ADLER, B.A.,

PREFACE TO THE FIRST EDITION.

PREFACE TO THE SECOND EDITION.

BEYOND the correction of a few misprints and some additions to the

All rights reserved.

Changes in Vowels, and Pausal forms

24-25 Pronouns joined to Prepositions

Relative Pronoun with Prepositions and Adverbs

4 7 - 5 0 B Inflection of changeable Nouns, Masculine

Inflection of changeable Nouns, Feminine...

56-62 Inseparable, Separable, and Inflected Particles

63-68 Cardinal and Ordinal Numbers, and their rules

The Root and the Conjugations

96-104 The Verb with

105-113 Guttural Verbs

114-115 Classes of Irregular Verbs

129-132 Doubly Irregular Verbs

133-136 Doubly Irregular Verbs {continued)

137-139 Hebrew Poetry

STUDENT'S HEBREW GRAMMAR.

The Alphabet consists of twenty-two letters, all of which

The Vowels are supplied by certain points

and dashes placed under, above, or in the middle of the

STUDENT'S HEBREW GRAMMAR.

Beth (Bice, Yice).

Sheen, Seen (.S^'d).

CLASSIFICATION OF THE LETTERS.

3 . There are two systems of reading Hebrewthe one

STUDENT'S HEBREW GRAMMAR.

In Class 4, both $ and & are included.

Po? 'tuguese reading.

Jbj5 f Oj5 (or re|? i

Notes on the Vowels.(a) Observe that the name of each vowel

Syllables a r e : ! . Open or simple, w h e n t h e y end in a

vowel or one of t h e letters

2. Closed or compound, w h e n t h e y end in

T h u s : ft55> b o t h syllables are closed.

NMP.In addition to t h e t e n vowels, there is a sign

w r i t t e n u n d e r a letter, called a fcO> (Sh e vo, Sh e va).

STUDENT'S HEBREW GRAMMAR.

There are two kinds of JfltP, viz. :

Pl3 &0^, the nlent or quiescent or resting JOB*.

2. yj Nlfe?> the sounding or moveable JOB*.

letter of a word, except (a) when the last letter is a "f, as

2. The sounding or moveable H)$ This has the sound of

short e in the phrase the books, said quickly, and is thus

sounding tfj#; as ^l-D^Sl b e shiv-t e -cho (b e shib-t e -cha).

short vowel, viz.:

i. - nne tpn; as in -\m; nton.

The Dogesh is a dot that can be placed in the centre of

The Weak Dogesh (Dogesh Lene) Sj5 &F\.

The Strong Dogesh (Dogesh Forte) DJPI S W The Weak Dogesh:This

only appears in the letters

rVS'S'l/J'S , and has the effect of hardening the letters (see

STUDENT'S HEBREW GRAMMAR.

(2) I n t h e middle of a word, after a silent XIJP. E x a m p l e s :

The Strong Dogesh occurs in all letters except TjMl'PTX,

and indicates t h a t t h e letter is to be doubled in t h e p r o n u n ciation.

This doubling of t h e letter (1) modifies t h e m e a n i n g

of t h e w o r d ; or (2) indicates t h a t t h e letter w i t h t h e Dogesh

Of (2), SiDpH instead of htS^Xl.

3 is assimilated to t h e p , and t h e doubling of t h e p is expressed

* Also called connective or conjunctive Dogesh.